This is a modern-English version of Practical Mechanics for Boys, originally written by Zerbe, James Slough. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


Spine

The "How-to-do-it" Books


PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR BOYS



THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS

The "How-To" Books

PRACTICAL MECHANICS
FOR BOYS

DIY Mechanics for Kids

In language which every boy can understand and so arranged that he may readily carry out any work from the instructions given.

In simple language that any boy can understand, and organized in a way that makes it easy for him to follow the instructions and complete any task.

WITH MANY ORIGINAL ILLUSTRATIONS

WITH ORIGINAL ILLUSTRATIONS

By J. S. ZERBE, M.E.

By J.S. Zerbe, M.E.

Author of

Writer of

CARPENTRY FOR BOYS          ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS

CARPENTRY FOR BOYS ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS

Printer's Mark: D with Lamp

M. A. DONOHUE & COMPANY

M. A. Donohue & Company

CHICAGO           ::            NEW YORK

CHICAGO :: NEW YORK

Copyright, 1914, by
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY

Copyright, 1914, by
The New York Book Co.

Made in U. S. A.

Made in the USA


CONTENTS

Introductory Page 1
 
I. On Tools Generally Page 7

Varied Requirements. List of Tools. Swivel Vises. Parts of Lathe. Chisels. Grinding Apparatus. Large Machines. Chucks. Bench Tools. Selecting a Lathe. Combination Square. Micrometers. Protractors. Utilizing Bevel Protractors. Truing Grindstones. Sets of Tools. The Work Bench. The Proper Dimensions. How Arranged.

Varied Requirements. List of Tools. Swivel Vises. Parts of a Lathe. Chisels. Grinding Equipment. Large Machines. Chucks. Bench Tools. Choosing a Lathe. Combination Square. Micrometers. Protractors. Using Bevel Protractors. Truing Grinding Wheels. Tool Sets. The Workbench. The Correct Dimensions. How to Arrange.

II. How to Grind and Sharpen Tools Page 26

Importance of the Cutting Tool. The Grinder. Correct Use of Grinder. Lathe Bitts. Roughing Tools. The Clearance. The Cutting Angle. Drills. Wrong Grinding. Chisels. Cold Chisels. System in Work. Wrong Use of Tools.

Importance of the Cutting Tool. The Grinder. Correct Use of Grinder. Lathe Bits. Roughing Tools. The Clearance. The Cutting Angle. Drills. Incorrect Grinding. Chisels. Cold Chisels. Organization in Work. Incorrect Use of Tools.

III. Setting and Holding Tools Page 34

Lathe Speed. The Hack-saw. Hack-saw Frame. The Blade. Files. Grindstones. Emery and Grinding Wheels. Carelessness in Holding Tools. Calipers. Care in Use of Calipers. Machine Bitts. The Proper Angle for Lathe Tools. Setting the Bitt. The Setting Angle. Bad Practice. Proper Lathe Speeds. Boring Tools on Lathe. The Rake of the Drill. Laps. Using the Lap. Surface Gages. Uses of the Surface Gage.

Lathe Speed. The Hacksaw. Hacksaw Frame. The Blade. Files. Grindstones. Emery and Grinding Wheels. Being Careful with Tools. Calipers. How to Use Calipers Carefully. Machine Bits. The Correct Angle for Lathe Tools. Setting the Bit. The Setting Angle. Poor Practices. Correct Lathe Speeds. Boring Tools on the Lathe. The Rake of the Drill. Laps. How to Use the Lap. Surface Gauges. Uses of the Surface Gauge.

p. ii
IV. On the First Use of the File Page 48

The First Test. Filing an Irregular Block. Filing a Bar Straight. Filing Bar with Parallel Sides. Surfacing Off Disks. True Surfacing. Precision Tools. Test of the Mechanic. Test Suggestions. Use of the Dividers. Cutting a Key-way. Key-way Difficulties. Filing Metal Round. Kinds of Files. Cotter-file. Square. Pinion. Half-round. Round. Triangular. Equalizing. Cross. Slitting. Character of File Tooth. Double Cut. Float-cut. Rasp Cut. Holding the File. Injuring Files. Drawing Back the File.

The First Test. Filing an Irregular Block. Filing a Straight Bar. Filing a Bar with Parallel Sides. Surfacing Off Disks. True Surfacing. Precision Tools. Mechanic's Test. Test Suggestions. Using the Dividers. Cutting a Keyway. Keyway Challenges. Filing Metal Round. Types of Files. Cotter-file. Square. Pinion. Half-round. Round. Triangular. Equalizing. Cross. Slitting. File Tooth Characteristics. Double Cut. Float-cut. Rasp Cut. Holding the File. Damaging Files. Drawing Back the File.

V. How to Commence Work Page 61

Familiarity with Tools. File Practice. Using the Dividers. Finding Centers. Hack-saw Practice. Cutting Metal True. Lathe Work. First Steps. Setting the Tool. Metals Used. The Four Important Things. Turning Up a Cylinder. Turning Grooves. Disks. Lathe Speeds.

Familiarity with Tools. File Practice. Using the Dividers. Finding Centers. Hack-saw Practice. Cutting Metal Accurately. Lathe Work. First Steps. Setting the Tool. Metals Used. The Four Key Things. Shaping a Cylinder. Creating Grooves. Disks. Lathe Speeds.

VI. Illustrating Some of the Fundamental Devices Page 68

Belt Lacing. Gears. Crown Wheel. Grooved Friction Gearing. A Valve which Closes by the Water Pressure. Cone Pulleys. Universal Joint. Trammel for Making Ellipses. Escapements. Simple Device to Prevent a Wheel or Shaft from Turning Back. Racks and Pinions. Mutilated Gears. Simple Shaft Coupling. Clutches. Ball and Socket Joints. Tripping Devices. Anchor Bolt. Lazy Tongs. Disk Shears. Wabble Saw. Crank Motion by a Slotted Yoke. Continuous Feed by Motion of a Lever. Crank Motion. Ratchet Head.p. iii Bench Clamp. Helico-volute Spring. Double helico-volute. Helical Spring. Single Volute Helix Spring. Flat Spiral, or Convolute. Eccentric Rod and Strap. Anti-dead Center for Lathe.

Belt Lacing. Gears. Crown Wheel. Grooved Friction Gearing. A Valve that Closes with Water Pressure. Cone Pulleys. Universal Joint. Trammel for Making Ellipses. Escapements. Simple Device to Stop a Wheel or Shaft from Turning Backward. Racks and Pinions. Damaged Gears. Simple Shaft Coupling. Clutches. Ball and Socket Joints. Tripping Devices. Anchor Bolt. Lazy Tongs. Disk Shears. Wobble Saw. Crank Motion with a Slotted Yoke. Continuous Feed Using Lever Motion. Crank Motion. Ratchet Head.p. iii Bench Clamp. Helico-volute Spring. Double Helico-volute. Helical Spring. Single Volute Helix Spring. Flat Spiral, or Convolute. Eccentric Rod and Strap. Anti-dead Center for Lathe.

VII. Properties of Materials Page 79

Elasticity. Traction. Torsion. Flexure. Tenacity. The Most Tenacious Metal. Ductility. Malleability. Hardness. Alloys. Resistance. Persistence. Conductivity. Equalization. Reciprocity. Molecular Forces. Attraction. Cohesion. Adhesion. Affinity. Porosity. Compressibility. Elasticity. Inertia. Momentum. Weight. Centripetal Force. Centrifugal Force. Capillary Attraction. The Sap of Trees. Sound. Acoustics. Sound Mediums. Vibration. Velocity of Sound. Sound Reflections. Resonance. Echos. Speaking Trumpet. The Stethoscope. The Vitascope. The Phonautograph. The Phonograph. Light. The Corpuscular Theory. Undulatory Theory. Luminous Bodies. Velocity of Light. Reflection. Refraction. Colors. The Spectroscope. The Rainbow. Heat. Expansion.

Elasticity. Traction. Torsion. Flexure. Tenacity. The Strongest Metal. Ductility. Malleability. Hardness. Alloys. Resistance. Persistence. Conductivity. Equalization. Reciprocity. Molecular Forces. Attraction. Cohesion. Adhesion. Affinity. Porosity. Compressibility. Elasticity. Inertia. Momentum. Weight. Centripetal Force. Centrifugal Force. Capillary Attraction. The Sap of Trees. Sound. Acoustics. Sound Mediums. Vibration. Speed of Sound. Sound Reflections. Resonance. Echoes. Speaking Trumpet. The Stethoscope. The Vitascope. The Phonautograph. The Phonograph. Light. The Corpuscular Theory. Undulatory Theory. Luminous Bodies. Speed of Light. Reflection. Refraction. Colors. The Spectroscope. The Rainbow. Heat. Expansion.

VIII. How Draughting Becomes a Valuable Aid Page 95

Lines in Drawing. Shading. Direction of Shade. Perspectives. The Most Pronounced Lines. Direction of Light. Scale Drawings. Degree, and What it Means. Memorizing Angles. Section Lining. Making Ellipses and Irregular Curves. Focal Points. Isometric and Perspective. The Protractor. Suggestions in Drawing. Holding the Pen. Inks. Tracing Cloth. Detail Paper. How to Proceed. Indicating Material by Section Lines.p. iv

Lines in Drawing. Shading. Direction of Shade. Perspectives. The Most Noticeable Lines. Direction of Light. Scale Drawings. Degree, and What it Means. Memorizing Angles. Section Lining. Creating Ellipses and Irregular Curves. Focal Points. Isometric and Perspective. The Protractor. Drawing Tips. Holding the Pen. Inks. Tracing Cloth. Detail Paper. How to Proceed. Indicating Material with Section Lines.p. iv

IX. Treatment and Use of Metals Page 112

Annealing. Toughness and Elasticity. The Process. Tempering. Tempering Contrasted with Annealing. Materials Used. Gradual Tempering. Fluxing. Uniting Metals. Alloying Method. Welding. Sweating. Welding Compounds. Oxidation. Soldering. Soft Solder. Hard Solder. Spelter. Soldering Acid. The Soldering Iron.

Annealing. Toughness and Elasticity. The Process. Tempering. Comparing Tempering and Annealing. Materials Used. Gradual Tempering. Fluxing. Joining Metals. Alloying Method. Welding. Sweating. Welding Compounds. Oxidation. Soldering. Soft Solder. Hard Solder. Spelter. Soldering Acid. The Soldering Iron.

X. On Gearing, and How Ordered Page 121

Spur and Pinion. Measuring a Gear. Pitch. Diametral Pitch. Circular Pitch. How to Order a Gear. Bevel and Miter Gears. Drawing Gears. Sprocket Wheels.

Spur and Pinion. Measuring a Gear. Pitch. Diametral Pitch. Circular Pitch. How to Order a Gear. Bevel and Miter Gears. Drawing Gears. Sprocket Wheels.

XI. Mechanical Power Page 128

The Lever. Wrong Inferences from Use of Lever. The Lever Principle. Powers vs. Distance Traveled. Power vs. Loss of Time. Wrongly-Directed Energy. The Lever and the Pulley. Sources of Power. Water Power. Calculating Fuel Energy. The Pressure or Head. Fuels. Power from Winds. Speed of Wind and Pressure. Varying Degrees of Pressure. Power from Waves and Tides. A Profitable Field.

The Lever. Misleading Conclusions from Use of Lever. The Lever Principle. Power vs. Distance Moved. Power vs. Time Spent. Misapplied Energy. The Lever and the Pulley. Sources of Power. Hydropower. Calculating Fuel Energy. The Pressure or Head. Fuels. Power from Wind. Wind Speed and Pressure. Different Levels of Pressure. Power from Waves and Tides. A Profitable Area.

XII. On Measures Page 139

Horse Power. Foot Pounds. Energy. How to Find Out the Power Developed. The Test. Calculations. The Foot Measure. Weight. The Gallon. The Metric System. Basis of Measurement. Metrical Table, Showing Measurements in Feet and Inches.p. v

Horsepower. Foot-pounds. Energy. How to Determine the Power Generated. The Test. Calculations. The Foot Measurement. Weight. The Gallon. The Metric System. Measurement Basis. Metric Table, Displaying Measurements in Feet and Inches.p. v

XIII. Useful Information for the Workshop Page 148

Finding the Circumference of a Circle. Diameter of a Circle. Area of a Circle. Area of a Triangle. Surface of a Ball. Solidity of a Sphere. Contents of a Cone. Capacity of a Pipe. Capacity of Tanks. To Toughen Aluminum. Amalgams. Prevent Boiler Scaling. Diamond Test. Making Glue Insoluble in Water. Taking Glaze Out of Grindstone. To Find Speeds of Pulleys. To Find the Diameters Required. To Prevent Belts from Slipping. Removing Boiler Scale. Gold Bronze. Cleaning Rusted Utensils. To Prevent Plaster of Paris from Setting Quickly. The Measurement of Liquids with Spoons.

Finding the Circumference of a Circle. Diameter of a Circle. Area of a Circle. Area of a Triangle. Surface of a Ball. Volume of a Sphere. Contents of a Cone. Capacity of a Pipe. Capacity of Tanks. To Toughen Aluminum. Alloys. Prevent Boiler Scaling. Diamond Test. Making Glue Waterproof. Removing Glaze from a Grindstone. To Calculate Speeds of Pulleys. To Determine Required Diameters. To Stop Belts from Slipping. Removing Boiler Scale. Gold Bronze. Cleaning Rusty Utensils. To Slow Down the Setting of Plaster of Paris. Measuring Liquids with Spoons.

XIV. Simplicity of Great Inventions and of Nature's Manifestation Page 152

Invention Precedes Science. Simplicity in Inventions. The Telegraph. Telephone. Transmitter. Phonograph. Wireless Telegraphy. Printing Telegraph. Electric Motor. Explosions. Vibrations in Nature. Qualities of Sound. The Photographer's Plate. Quadruplex Telegraphy. Electric Harmony. Odors. Odophone. A Bouquet of Vibrations. Taste. Color.

Invention Comes Before Science. Simple Inventions: The Telegraph, Telephone, Transmitter, Phonograph, Wireless Telegraphy, Printing Telegraph, Electric Motor, Explosions, Vibrations in Nature, Qualities of Sound, Photographer's Plate, Quadruplex Telegraphy, Electric Harmony, Odors, Odophone, A Bouquet of Vibrations, Taste, Color.

XV. Workshop Recipes and Formulas Page 160

Adhesives for Various Uses. Belt Glue. Cements. Transparent Cement. U. S. Government Gum. To Make Different Alloys. Bell-metal. Brass. Bronzes. Boiler Compounds. Celluloid. Clay Mixture for Forges. Modeling Clay. Fluids for Cleaning Clothes, Furniture, etc. Disinfectants. Deodorants. Emery for Lapping Purposes. Explosives. Fulminates. Files, and How top. vi Keep Clean. Renewing Files. Fire-proof Materials or Substances. Floor Dressings. Stains. Foot Powders. Frost Bites. Glass. To Frost. How to Distinguish. Iron and Steel. To Soften Castings. Lacquers. For Aluminum and Brass. Copper. Lubricants. Paper. Photography. Plasters. Plating, Coloring Metals. Polishes. Putty. Rust Preventives. Solders. Soldering Fluxes. Steel Tempering. Varnishes. Sealing Wax.

Adhesives for Various Uses. Belt Glue. Cements. Clear Adhesive. U.S. Government Gum. To Make Different Alloys. Bell Metal. Brass. Bronzes. Boiler Compounds. Celluloid. Clay Mixture for Forges. Modeling Clay. Cleaning Fluids for Clothes, Furniture, etc. Disinfectants. Deodorants. Emery for Lapping Purposes. Explosives. Fulminates. Files, and How top. vi Keep Clean. Renewing Files. Fireproof Materials or Substances. Floor Dressings. Stains. Foot Powders. Frostbite. Glass. To Frost. How to Distinguish. Iron and Steel. To Soften Castings. Lacquers. For Aluminum and Brass. Copper. Lubricants. Paper. Photography. Plasters. Plating, Coloring Metals. Polishes. Putty. Rust Preventives. Solders. Soldering Fluxes. Steel Tempering. Varnishes. Sealing Wax.

XVI. Handy Tables Page 178

Table of Weights for Round and Square Steel. Table of Weight of Flat Steel Bars. Avoirdupois Weight. Troy Weight. Apothecaries' Weight. Linear Measure. Long Measure. Square Measure. Solid or Cubic Measure. Dry Measure. Liquid Measure. Paper Measure. Table of Temperatures. Strength of Various Metals. Freezing Mixtures. Ignition Temperatures. Power and Heat Equivalents.

Table of Weights for Round and Square Steel. Table of Weights for Flat Steel Bars. Avoirdupois Weight. Troy Weight. Apothecaries' Weight. Linear Measure. Long Measure. Square Measure. Solid or Cubic Measure. Dry Measure. Liquid Measure. Paper Measure. Table of Temperatures. Strength of Different Metals. Freezing Mixtures. Ignition Temperatures. Power and Heat Equivalents.

XVII. Inventions and Patents, and Information About the Rights and Duties of Inventors and Workmen Page 188

The Machinist's Opportunities. What is an Inventor? Idea Not Invention. What an Invention Must Have. Obligation of the Model Builder. Paying for Developing Devices. Time for Filing an Application. Selling an Unpatented Invention. Joint Inventors. Joint Owners Not Partners. Partnerships in Patents. Form of Protection Issued by the Government. Life of a Patent. Interference Proceedings. Concurrent Applications. Granting Interference. Steps in Interference. First Sketches. First Model. First Operative Machine.p. vii Preliminary Statements. Proving Invention. What Patents Are Issued For. Owner's Rights. Divided and Undivided Patents. Assignments. How Made. What an Invention Must Have. Basis for Granting Patent in the United States. Reasons for Granting Abroad. Original Grants of Patents. International Agreement. Application for Patents. Course of Procedure. Costs. Filing a Matter of Secrecy.

The Machinist's Opportunities. What is an Inventor? Idea vs. Invention. What an Invention Needs. Responsibilities of the Model Builder. Paying for Device Development. Time to File an Application. Selling an Unpatented Invention. Joint Inventors. Joint Owners are Not Partners. Patent Partnerships. Type of Protection Issued by the Government. Patent Duration. Interference Proceedings. Simultaneous Applications. Granting Interference. Steps in Interference. Initial Sketches. First Model. First Working Machine.p. vii Preliminary Statements. Proving Invention. What Patents Are Granted For. Owner's Rights. Divided and Undivided Patents. Assignments. How They Are Made. What an Invention Must Have. Basis for Granting Patents in the United States. Reasons for Granting Abroad. Original Patent Grants. International Agreement. Patent Application Process. Procedure Overview. Costs. Filing is a Matter of Secrecy.

Glossary of Words Page 195
 
Index Page 213
 

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

FIG.   PAGE
1. Bench vise 8
2. Pipe grip for vise 9
3. Swivel vise 10
4. Speed lathe 11
5. Calipers 12
6. Engine lathe 13
7. Center gage 14
8. Pocket screw and wire gage 15
9. Handy bench vise 16
10. Combination square 17
11. Uses of the combination square 18
12. A quick adjusting micrometer 19
13. Universal bevel protractor 20
14. Uses of universal bevel protractor 21
15. Grindstone truing device 22
16. Set of tools and case 23
17. The work bench 24
18. Hook tool 28
19. Parting tool 28
20. Knife tool 28
21. Right-hand side tool 28
22. Internal tool 28
23. Left-hand side tool 28
24. Tool for wrought iron 29
25. Tool for cast iron 29
26. End view of drill 31
27. Side view of drill 31
28. Hack-saw frame 35
29. Hack-saw blade 35
30. Plain hook tool 38
31. Plain straight tool 38
32. Proper angles for tools 39
33. Angles for tools 39
34. Angles for tools 39
35. Set of the bitt 40
36. Correct angle 41
37. Wrong angle 41
38. Too low 42
39. Improper set 42
40. Internal set 43
41. Set for brass 43
42. Surface gage 44
43. Uses of surface gage 46
44. Rounded surface 49
45. Winding surface 49
46. Hexagon nut 51
47. Laying off hexagon nut 51
48. Cutting key-way 52
49. Key-seat rule 54
50. Filing metal round 54
51. Filing metal round 54
52. Making a round bearing 55
53. Making a round bearing 55
54. Cross section of file 56
55. Files 58
56. Correct file movement 59
57. Incorrect file movement 60
58. Belt lacing 69
59. Belt lacing 69
60. Belt lacing 69
61. Belt lacing 69
62. Bevel gears 71
63. Miter gears 71
64. Crown wheel 71
65. Grooved friction gears 71
66. Valve 71
67. Cone pulleys 71
68. Universal joint 71
69. Trammel 73
70. Escapement 73
71. Device for holding wheel 73
72. Rack and pinion 73
73. Mutilated gears 73
74. Shaft coupling 73
75. Clutches 75
76. Ball and socket joints 75
77. Fastening ball 75
78. Tripping devices 75
79. Anchor bolt 75
80. Lazy tongs 75
81. Disc shears 75
82. Wabble saw 76
83. Continuous crank motion 76
84. Continues feed 76
85. Crank motion 76
86. Ratchet head 76
87. Bench clamp 76
88. Helico-volute spring 77
89. Double helico-volute 77
90. Helical spring 77
91. Single volute-helix 77
92. Flat spiral or convolute 77
93. Eccentric rod or strap 77
94. Anti dead-centers for lathes 77
95. Plain circle 95
96. Ring 96
97. Raised surface 96
98. Sphere 96
99. Depressed surface 96
100. Concave 97
101. Forms of cubical outlines 98
102. Forms of cubical outlines 98
103. Forms of cubical outlines 98
104. Forms of cubical outlines 98
105. Shading edges 99
106. Shading edges 99
107. Illustrating heavy lines 100
108. Illustrating heavy lines 100
109. Lines on plain surfaces 101
110. Lines on plain surfaces 101
111. Illustrating degrees 102
112. Section lining 103
113. Drawing an ellipse 104
114. Perspective at angles 106
115. Perspective of cube 107
116. Perspective of cube 107
117. Perspective of cube 107
118. Protractor 108
119. Using the protractor 109
120. Section-lining metals 110
121. Spur gears 122
122. Miter gear pitch 123
123. Bevel gears 124
124. Laying of miter gears 125
125. Sprocket wheel 128
126. Simple lever 129
127. Lever action 130
128. The pulley 132
129. Change of direction 133
130. Change of direction 133
131. Steam pressure 135
132. Water pressure 135
133. Prony brake 141
134. Speed indicator 142

PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR BOYS

INTRODUCTORYToC

The American method of teaching the mechanical arts has some disadvantages, as compared with the apprentice system followed in England, and very largely on the continent.

The American way of teaching mechanical skills has some downsides when compared to the apprenticeship system used in England and much of Europe.

It is too often the case that here a boy or a young man begins work in a machine shop, not for the avowed purpose of learning the trade, but simply as a helper, with no other object in view than to get his weekly wages.

It’s too common for a boy or a young man to start working in a machine shop not to actually learn the trade, but just as a helper, only focused on getting his weekly paycheck.

Abroad, the plan is one which, for various reasons, could not be tolerated here. There he is bound for a certain term of years, and with the prime object of teaching him to become an artisan. More often than otherwise he pays for this privilege, and he knows it is incumbent on him "to make good" right from the start.

Abroad, the plan is one that, for various reasons, wouldn't be accepted here. There, he is committed for a specific number of years, primarily to learn to become a skilled worker. More often than not, he pays for this opportunity, and he understands that it’s his responsibility to "make good" from the very beginning.

He labors under the disadvantage, however, that he has a certain tenure, and in that course he is not pushed forward from one step to the next on account of any merit of his own. His advancement is fixed by the time he has put in at eachp. 2 part of the work, and thus no note is taken of his individuality.

He struggles with the downside that he has a set position, and because of that, he isn't promoted based on his own merit. His progress is determined by the time he has spent in eachp. 2 part of the job, so his individuality isn't recognized.

Here the boy rises step after step by virtue of his own qualifications, and we recognize that one boy has the capacity to learn faster than another. If he can learn in one year what it requires three in another to acquire, in order to do it as perfectly, it is an injury to the apt workman to be held back and deterred from making his way upwardly.

Here, the boy advances step by step based on his own abilities, and we see that one boy can learn quicker than another. If he can master in one year what takes another three years to learn, and do it just as well, it’s a disadvantage for the skilled worker to be held back and prevented from moving forward.

It may be urged that the apprentice system instills thoroughness. This may be true; but it also does another thing: It makes the man a mere machine. The true workman is a thinker. He is ever on the alert to find easier, quicker and more efficient means for doing certain work.

It might be argued that the apprenticeship system teaches thoroughness. This may be true, but it also does something else: it turns the person into just a machine. A true craftsman is a thinker. He's always looking for easier, faster, and more efficient ways to get work done.

What is called "Efficiency" in labor methods, can never obtain in an apprenticeship system for this reason. In a certain operation, where twelve motions are required to do a certain thing, and a minute to perform the twelve operations, a simplified way, necessitating only eight motions, means a difference in saving one-third of the time. The nineteen hundred fewer particular movements in a day's work, being a less strain on the operator, both physically and mentally, to say nothing whatever of the advantages which the proprietor of the shop would gain.p. 3

What we call "Efficiency" in work methods can never be achieved in an apprenticeship system for this reason. In a certain task that requires twelve movements to accomplish something, and it takes a minute to complete those twelve actions, a streamlined approach that only requires eight movements saves one-third of the time. The reduction of nineteen hundred specific movements in a day's work puts less physical and mental strain on the worker, not to mention the benefits that the shop owner would gain.p. 3

I make this a leading text in the presentation of this book; namely, that individual merit and stimulus is something of such extreme importance that it should be made the keynote for every boy who tries to become a mechanic.

I emphasize this point in the introduction of this book: individual skill and motivation are so incredibly important that they should be the central focus for every boy who wants to become a mechanic.

The machinist easily occupies a leading place in the multitude of trades and occupations. There is hardly an article of use but comes to the market through his hands. His labor is most diverse, and in his employment doing machine work he is called upon to do things which vary widely in their character.

The machinist easily takes a top spot among the various trades and jobs. Almost every useful item on the market has passed through his hands. His work is very diverse, and in his role doing machine work, he is required to handle tasks that vary greatly in nature.

These require special knowledge, particular tools, and more frequently than otherwise, a high order of inventive ability to enable him to accomplish the task.

These tasks need specific knowledge, special tools, and often a high level of creativity to get done.

The boy should be taught, at the outset, that certain things must be learned thoroughly, and that habits in a machine shop can be bad as well as good. When he once becomes accustomed to putting a tool back in its rightful place the moment he is through with it, he has taken a long step toward efficiency.

The boy should be taught from the beginning that some things need to be learned thoroughly, and that habits in a machine shop can be both good and bad. Once he gets used to putting a tool back in its proper place as soon as he’s done using it, he will have made significant progress toward being efficient.

When he grasps a tool and presents it to the work without turning it over several times, or has acquired the knack of picking up the right tool at the proper place, he is making strides inp. 4 the direction of becoming a rapid and skilled workman.

When he picks up a tool and presents it to the task without flipping it around multiple times, or has learned how to grab the right tool at the right spot, he is progressing towards becoming a fast and skilled worker.p. 4

These, and many other things of like import, will require our attention throughout the various chapters.

These, and many other similar things, will need our attention throughout the various chapters.

It is not the intention of the book to make every boy who reads and studies it, a machinist; nor have we any desire to present a lot of useful articles as samples of what to make. The object is to show the boy what are the requirements necessary to make him a machinist; how to hold, handle, sharpen and grind the various tools; the proper ones to use for each particular character of work; how the various machines are handled and cared for; the best materials to use; and suggest the numerous things which can be done in a shop which will pave the way for making his work pleasant as well as profitable.

The goal of this book isn't to turn every boy who reads and studies it into a machinist, nor do we want to just provide a list of useful items as examples of what to create. Instead, we aim to show boys what it takes to become a machinist, including how to hold, handle, sharpen, and grind different tools; which tools are best for each type of work; how to operate and maintain various machines; the ideal materials to use; and to suggest many activities they can pursue in a shop that will make their work enjoyable and rewarding.

It also analyzes the manner in which the job is laid out; how to set the tools to get the most effective work; and explains what is meant by making a finished piece of workmanship. These things, properly acquired, each must determine in his own mind whether he is adapted to follow up the work.

It also looks at how the job is structured; how to arrange the tools to achieve the best results; and explains what it means to create a finished piece of craftsmanship. These aspects, once understood, require each person to decide for themselves whether they are suited to pursue the work.

Over and above all, we shall try to give the boy some stimulus for his work. Unless he takes an interest in what he is doing, he willp. 5 never become an artisan in the true sense of the word.

Above all, we will try to give the boy some motivation for his work. If he doesn't take an interest in what he's doing, he willp. 5 never become a true artisan.

Go through the book, and see whether, here and there, you do not get some glimpses of what it means to take a pleasure in doing each particular thing, and you will find in every instance that it is a satisfaction because you have learned to perform it with ease.

Go through the book and see if you can spot moments that show what it means to enjoy doing each specific thing. You'll notice in every case that it feels rewarding because you've learned to do it effortlessly.

I do not know of anything which has done as much to advance the arts and manufactures, during the last century, as the universal desire to improve the form, shape and structure of tools; and the effort to invent new ones. This finds its reflection everywhere in the production of new and improved products.

I don't know of anything that has done as much to advance the arts and manufacturing over the last century as the widespread desire to improve the design, shape, and structure of tools, along with the effort to invent new ones. This is reflected everywhere in the production of new and better products.

In this particular I have been led to formulate a homely sentence which expresses the idea: Invention consists in doing an old thing a new way; or a new thing any way.

In this specific case, I've come up with a simple statement that conveys the idea: Invention is about doing something old in a new way, or doing something new in any way.

The Author.

The Author.

p. 7

CHAPTER IToC

ON TOOLS GENERALLY

Judging from the favorable comments of educators, on the general arrangement of the subject matter in the work on "Carpentry for Boys," I am disposed to follow that plan in this book in so far as it pertains to tools.

Based on the positive feedback from teachers about the overall organization of the content in the book "Carpentry for Boys," I’m inclined to adopt that approach in this book regarding tools.

In this field, as in "Carpentry," I do not find any guide which is adapted to teach the boy the fundamentals of mechanics. Writers usually overlook the fact, that as the boy knows nothing whatever about the subject, he could not be expected to know anything about tools.

In this area, just like in "Carpentry," I don't see any guide that’s suited to teach young people the basics of mechanics. Authors often forget that since the boy knows absolutely nothing about the topic, he can't be expected to understand anything about tools.

To describe them gives a start in the education, but it is far short of what is necessary for one in his condition. If he is told that the chisel or bit for a lathe has a diamond point, or is round-nosed, and must be ground at a certain angle, he naturally wants to know, as all boys do, why it should be at that angle.

To explain them is a beginning in education, but it doesn’t come close to what someone in his situation really needs. If he learns that the chisel or bit for a lathe has a diamond point, or is round-nosed, and needs to be ground at a specific angle, he naturally wants to know, just like all boys do, why it should be at that angle.

So in the setting of the tools with relation to the work, the holding and manipulation of the file, of the drill for accurate boring, together with numerous little things, are all taken for granted, and the boy blunders along with the ultimate obp. 8ject in sight, without having the pathway cleared so he may readily reach the goal.

So in terms of the tools related to the work, the way the file and drill are held and used for precise boring, along with many small details, is all assumed. The boy fumbles along with the final objective in sight, without having a clear path to easily reach his goal.

Varied Requirements.—The machinist's trade is one which requires the most varied tools of all occupations, and they are by all odds the most expensive to be found in the entire list of vocations.

Different Requirements.—The machinist's trade demands a wide range of tools compared to other jobs, and without a doubt, they are the most expensive in the entire spectrum of professions.

Fig. 1. Bench Vise. Fig. 1. Bench Vise.ToList

This arises from the fact that he must work with the most stubborn of all materials. He finds resistance at every step in bringing forth a product.

This comes from the fact that he has to work with the most difficult materials. He faces obstacles at every turn in creating a product.

List of Tools.—With a view of familiarizingp. 9 the boy with this great variety the following list is compiled, from which we shall select the ones essential in the initial equipment of a small shop.

Tool List.—To help the boy get to know this wide range of tools, we’ve put together the following list, from which we will choose the essentials for setting up a small shop.

Vises.—One small, good vise is infinitely preferable to two bad ones. For ordinary work a 3-inch jaw is preferable, and it should be firmly mounted on the bench. So many kinds are now made that it would be a costly thing to purchase one for each special use, therefore the boy will find it profitable to make some attachments for the ordinary vise.

Vises.—One small, decent vise is way better than two poor ones. For general tasks, a 3-inch jaw is recommended, and it should be securely attached to the workbench. With so many types available now, it would be expensive to buy one for each specific use, so it's a good idea for the kid to make some attachments for the regular vise.

Fig. 2. Pipe Grip for Vise. Fig. 2. Pipe Grip for Vise. ToList

Swivel Vises.—A swivel vise is always a good tool, the cost being not excessive over the ordinary kind. Then a pair of grips for holding pipe, or round material which is to be threaded, can readily be made.

Swivel Clamps.—A swivel vise is always a useful tool, and it doesn't cost much more than a regular one. You can also easily create a pair of grips for holding pipe or round material that needs to be threaded.

The drawing (Fig. 2) shows a serviceable pair of grips, made to fit the jaws of a vise, and willp. 10 be acceptable in much of the work. Then, the vise should be provided with copper caps for the jaws to be used when making up articles which would otherwise be injured by the jaws.

The drawing (Fig. 2) shows a practical pair of grips designed to fit the jaws of a vise and willp. 10 be suitable for much of the work. Additionally, the vise should have copper caps for the jaws to protect items that could be damaged by the jaws.

Fig. 3. Swivel Vise. Fig. 3. Swivel Vise.ToList

Let us get a comprehensive view of the different kinds of tools necessary in a fully equipped shop.

Let’s take a complete look at the various types of tools needed in a fully equipped shop.

Parts of Lathe.—The first thing of importance is the lathe, and of these there is quite a variety, and among the accompaniments are the slide rest, mandrel, back gear, division plate, angle plate, cone plate and various chucks

Lathe Components.—The most important part is the lathe itself, and there are many different types available. Some of the accompanying parts include the slide rest, mandrel, back gear, division plate, angle plate, cone plate, and various chucks.

p. 11

There must also be change wheels, studs and quadrant plates, self-acting feed for surfacing and cross slide, and clamping nuts.

There also need to be change wheels, studs, and quadrant plates, automatic feed for surfacing and cross slide, and clamping nuts.

Drilling machines, both hand and power, hand and ratchet braces and breast-drill stocks.

Drilling machines, including hand drills, power drills, hand braces, ratchet braces, and breast drill stocks.

Fig. 4—Speed Lathe. Fig. 4.—Speed Lathe.ToList

Chisels.—Chisels of various kinds, for chipping and cross-cutting; round-nosed, centering, set punches, tommies and drifts.

Chisels.—Chisels of different types for carving and cutting; round-nosed, centering, set punches, tommies, and drifts.

Back, tee and centering square; bevels, spirit level, inside and outside calipers, straight edges, rules and surface plates

Back, tee and centering square; bevels, level, inside and outside calipers, straightedges, rulers, and surface plates

p. 12

Gages for boring, scribing blocks, steel and brass scribes, stocks and dies, screw-plates, taps for bolts, reamers.

Gauges for boring, marking blocks, steel and brass markers, stocks and dies, screw plates, taps for bolts, reamers.

Fig. 5. Calipers Fig. 5. CalipersToList

Files for various descriptions, countersinks, frame and hack saws.

Files for different types, countersinks, frame saws, and hacksaws.

Grinding Apparatus.—Emery wheel, cloth and paper, paper, flour emery, polishing powders, laps and buffs, and polishing sticks

Grinding Machine.—Emery wheel, cloth and paper, paper, flour emery, polishing powders, laps and buffs, and polishing sticks

p. 13
Fig. 6. Engine Lathe. Fig. 6. Engine Lathe.ToList
p. 14

Forge, anvils, tongs, swages, punches, bolt tools, hot and cold chisels, blow-pipe, soldering iron, hard and soft solders, borax, spirits of salts, oil, resin and spelter.

Forge, anvils, tongs, swages, punches, bolt tools, hot and cold chisels, blowpipe, soldering iron, hard and soft solders, borax, hydrochloric acid, oil, resin, and solder.

To this may be added an endless variety of small bench tools, micrometers, protractors, arbors, collets, box tools and scrapers.

To this can be added a limitless variety of small bench tools, micrometers, protractors, arbors, collets, box tools, and scrapers.

Fig. 7. Center Gage. Fig. 7. Center Gage.ToList

Large Machines.—The list would not be complete without the planer, shaper and milling machine, with their variety of chucks, clamps and other attachments, too numerous to mention.

Heavy Machinery.—The list wouldn't be complete without the planer, shaper, and milling machine, along with their many chucks, clamps, and other attachments that are too numerous to list.

The foregoing show what a wonderful variety of articles are found in a well-equipped shop, all of which can be conveniently used; but to the boy who has only a small amount of money, a workable set is indicated as follows:

The earlier discussion highlights the amazing variety of items available in a well-stocked store, all of which are practical; however, for the boy with only a little money, a useful set is suggested as follows:

A small lathe, with an 8-inch swing, can be obtained at a low cost, provided with a countershaft complete.

A small lathe with an 8-inch swing can be purchased at a low price, complete with a countershaft.

Chucks.—With this should go a small chuck,p. 15 and a face-plate for large work, unless a large chuck can also be acquired. This, with a dozen tools of various sizes, and also small bits for drilling purposes.

Chuck Taylors.—Along with this, you should have a small chuck,p. 15 and a faceplate for larger projects, unless you can also get a large chuck. This should come with a dozen tools of different sizes and small bits for drilling.

The lathe will answer all purposes for drilling, but small drilling machines are now furnished at very low figures, and such a machine will take off a great deal of duty from the lathe.

The lathe can handle all drilling tasks, but small drilling machines are now available at very low prices, and having one will reduce a lot of work from the lathe.

Fig. 8. Pocket Screw and Wire Gage. Fig. 8. Pocket Screw and Wire Gauge.ToList

As the lathe is of prime importance, never use it for drilling, if you have a driller, as it always has enough work to do for tuning up work.

As the lathe is very important, never use it for drilling if you have a drill, since it always has plenty of work to do for tuning tasks.

Bench Tools.—Of bench tools, a 3-inch vise, various files, center punch, two hammers, round and A-shaped peons, hack saw, compasses, inside and outside calipers, screw driver, cold chisels, metal square, level, straight edge, bevel square, reamers, small emery wheel and an oil stone, make a fairly good outfit to start with, and these can be added to from time to time.

Workshop Tools.—For bench tools, a 3-inch vise, various files, a center punch, two hammers, round and A-shaped peons, a hacksaw, compasses, inside and outside calipers, a screwdriver, cold chisels, a metal square, a level, a straight edge, a bevel square, reamers, a small emery wheel, and an oil stone make a pretty solid setup to begin with, and you can add to these over time.

Everything in the machine shop centers aboutp. 16 the lathe. It is the king of all tools. The shaper and planer may be most efficient for surfacing, and the milling machine for making grooves and gears, or for general cutting purposes, but the lathe possesses a range of work not possible with either of the other tools, and for that reason should be selected with great care.

Everything in the machine shop revolves aroundp. 16 the lathe. It's the most important tool. While the shaper and planer are great for surfacing, and the milling machine is best for creating grooves, gears, or general cutting, the lathe can handle a variety of tasks that the other tools can't match. For that reason, it should be chosen very carefully.

Fig. 9. Handy Bench Vise. Fig. 9. Handy Bench Vise.ToList

Selecting a Lathe.—The important things about a lathe are the spindle bearings and the ways for the tool-holder. The least play in either will ruin any work. Every other part may bep. 17 defective, but with solidly built bearing-posts and bearings, your lathe will be effective.

Choosing a lathe.—The key aspects of a lathe are the spindle bearings and the tracks for the tool holder. Even a little bit of play in either will mess up your work. Every other part can bep. 17 faulty, but if the bearing posts and bearings are well-made, your lathe will perform well.

For this reason it will not pay to get a cheap tool. Better get a small, 6-inch approved tool of this kind, than a larger cheap article. It may pay with other tools, but with a lathe never.

For this reason, it's not worth it to buy a cheap tool. It's better to get a small, 6-inch approved tool of this type than a larger, cheaper one. It might work with other tools, but never with a lathe.

Never do grinding on a lathe. The fine emery, or grinding material, is sure to reach the bearings; it matters not what care is exercised. There is only one remedy for this—overhauling.

Never grind on a lathe. The fine grit or grinding material is guaranteed to get into the bearings, no matter how careful you are. The only solution to this is overhauling.

Fig. 10.—Combination Square. Fig. 10.—Combo Square.ToList

Combination Square.—A tool of this kind is most essential, however small. It can be used as a try-square, and has this advantage, that the head can be made to slide along the rule and be clamped at any point. It has a beveling and a leveling device, as well.

Combination Square.—This tool is very important, no matter how small. It can be used as a try-square, and it has the added benefit that the head can slide along the rule and be secured at any position. It also features a beveling and leveling function.

p. 18 Fig. 11.—Uses of the Combination Square. Fig. 11.—Applications of the Combination Square. ToList

The combination square provides a means forp. 19 doing a great variety of work, as it combines the qualities of a rule, square, miter, depth gage, height gage, level and center head.

The combination square is a versatile tool that allows forp. 19 a wide range of tasks, as it includes the functions of a ruler, square, miter, depth gauge, height gauge, level, and center head.

Fig. 12.—A Quick Adjusting Micrometer. Fig. 12.—A Quick-Adjust Micrometer.ToList

The full page illustration (Fig. 11) shows some of the uses and the particular manner of holding the tool.

The full-page illustration (Fig. 11) shows some of the ways the tool is used and how to hold it correctly.

Micrometers.—Tools of this description are made which will accurately measure work in dip. 20mensions of ten-thousandths of an inch up to an inch.

Micrometer gauges.—Tools like these are made to accurately measure work in dimensions of ten-thousandths of an inch up to an inch.

The illustration (Fig. 12) shows an approved tool, and this is so constructed that it can instantly be changed and set by merely pressing the end of the plunger as shown.

The illustration (Fig. 12) shows a certified tool, and it’s designed so that you can quickly change and adjust it just by pressing the end of the plunger as shown.

Fig. 13.—A Universal Bevel Protractor. Fig. 13.—A Universal Bevel Protractor.ToList

Protractors.—As all angles are not obtainable by the square or bevel, a protractor is a most desirable addition to the stock of tools. As one side of the tool is flat it is convenient for laying on the paper when drafting, as well as for use on the work.

Protractors.—Since not all angles can be measured with a square or bevel, a protractor is a highly valuable tool to have in your toolkit. One side of the tool is flat, making it easy to place on paper when drawing, as well as to use on the actual work.

The protractor has a graduated disk, and is adjustable so it can be disposed at any angle.

The protractor has a marked disk and can be adjusted to be positioned at any angle.

p. 21
Fig. 14.—Universal Bevel Protractor, showing its uses. Fig. 14.—Universal Bevel Protractor,
displaying its applications.
ToList
p. 22

All special tools of this kind are serviceable, and the boy should understand their uses, even though he is not able for the time being to acquire them. To learn how they are applied in daily use is an education in itself.

All special tools like these are useful, and the boy should know what they're for, even if he can't get them right now. Learning how they are used in everyday life is an education in itself.

Utilizing Bevel Protractor.—Examine the full-page illustration (Fig. 14), and see how the bevel protractor is utilized to measure the angles of work, whether it is tapering heads or different kinds of nuts, or end and side surfacing, and it will teach an important lesson.

Using a Bevel Protractor.—Look at the full-page illustration (Fig. 14), and see how the bevel protractor is used to measure angles in various tasks, whether it’s tapering heads, different types of nuts, or end and side surfacing. It offers a valuable lesson.

Fig. 15.—Grindstone Truing Device. Fig. 15.—Grindstone Leveling Tool.ToList

Truing Grindstones.—Devices for truing up grindstones are now made, and the illustration (Fig. 15) shows a very efficient machine for this purpose. It can be applied instantly to the facep. 23 of the stone, and it works automatically, without interfering with the use of the stone.

Sharpening Grindstones.—Devices for sharpening grindstones are now available, and the illustration (Fig. 15) shows a highly effective machine for this task. It can be quickly applied to the facep. 23 of the stone and works automatically, without disrupting the use of the stone.

It is frequently the case that an emery wheel will become glazed, due to its extreme hardness. This is also caused, sometimes, by running it at too high a speed. If the glazing continues after the speed is reduced, it should be ground down an eighth of an inch or so. This will, usually, remedy the defect.

It often happens that an emery wheel gets glazed because of its extreme hardness. This can also occur if it's run at too high a speed. If glazing keeps happening even after lowering the speed, it should be ground down about an eighth of an inch. This usually fixes the problem.

Fig. 16.—Set of Tools and Case. Fig. 16.—Tool Set and Case.ToList

Sets of Tools.—A cheap and convenient set ofp. 24 precision tools is shown in Fig. 16, which is kept in a neat folding leather case. The set consists of a 6-inch combination square, complete center punch, 6-inch flexible steel rule center gage, 4-inch calipers, 4-inch outside caliper with solid nut, 4-inch inside caliper with solid nut, and a 4-inch divider with a solid nut.

Toolkits.—An affordable and handy set ofp. 24 precision tools is shown in Fig. 16, which is stored in a tidy folding leather case. The set includes a 6-inch combination square, a complete center punch, a 6-inch flexible steel ruler center gage, 4-inch calipers, a 4-inch outside caliper with a solid nut, a 4-inch inside caliper with a solid nut, and a 4-inch divider with a solid nut.

Fig. 17. The Work Bench. Fig. 17. The Work Bench.ToList

The Work Bench.—This is the mechanic's fort. His capacity for work will depend on its arrangement. To the boy this is particularly interesting, and for his uses it should be made full three inches lower than the standard height.

The Workspace.—This is the mechanic's stronghold. His ability to work will depend on how it's set up. For the boy, this is especially fascinating, and for his needs, it should be made a full three inches lower than the standard height.

A good plan to judge of the proper height is to measure from the jaws of the vise. The top of the jaw should be on a level with the elbows. Grasp a file with both hands, and hold it as thoughp. 25 in the act of filing across the work; then measure up from the floor to the elbows, when they are held in that position.

A good way to determine the right height is to measure from the jaws of the vise. The top of the jaw should be at elbow level. Hold a file with both hands as ifp. 25 you were filing across the work; then measure from the floor to your elbows in that position.

The Proper Dimensions.—This plan will give you a sure means of selecting a height that is best adapted for your work. The regulation bench is about 38 inches high, and assuming that the vise projects up about 4 inches more, would bring the top of the jaws about 42 to 44 inches from the floor. It is safe to fix the height of the bench at not less than 34 inches.

The Right Dimensions.—This plan will help you choose the best height for your work. The standard bench is about 38 inches high, and if the vise adds around 4 inches more, the top of the jaws would be about 42 to 44 inches from the floor. It's safe to set the bench height at no less than 34 inches.

This should have a drawer, preferably near the right-hand end of the bench. The vise should be at the left side, and the bench in your front should be free of any fixed tools.

This should have a drawer, ideally near the right end of the bench. The vise should be on the left side, and the bench in front of you should be clear of any permanent tools.

How Arranged.—Have a rack above the bench at the rear, for the various tools when not in use, and the rear board of the bench should be elevated above the front planks several inches, on which the various tools can be put, other than those which are suspended on the rack above.

How It’s Organized.—Install a rack above the bench at the back for storing various tools when they’re not in use, and the back board of the bench should be raised a few inches higher than the front planks to hold additional tools that aren’t hung up on the rack above.

The advantage of this is, that a bench will accumulate a quantity of material that the tools can hide in, and there is nothing more annoying than to hunt over a lot of trash to get what is needed. It is necessary to emphasize the necessity of always putting a tool back in its proper place, immediately after using

The benefit of this is that a workbench will gather materials that the tools can be hidden in, and there's nothing more frustrating than searching through a bunch of clutter to find what you need. It's important to stress the need to always return a tool to its designated spot right after using it.


CHAPTER IIToC

HOW TO GRIND AND SHARPEN TOOLS

It is singular, that with the immense variety of tools set forth in the preceding chapter, how few, really, require the art of the workman to grind and sharpen. If we take the lathe, the drilling machine, as well as the shaper, planer, milling machine, and all power-driven tools, they are merely mechanism contrived to handle some small, and, apparently, inconsequential tool, which does the work on the material.

It's interesting that, despite the wide range of tools discussed in the previous chapter, very few actually need the craftsman's skill to grind and sharpen. If we consider the lathe, the drilling machine, and also the shaper, planer, milling machine, and all the powered tools, they are just mechanisms designed to operate some small and seemingly insignificant tool that does the work on the material.

Importance of the Cutting Tool.—But it is this very fact that makes the preparation of that part of the mechanism so important. Here we have a lathe, weighing a thousand pounds, worth hundreds of dollars, concentrating its entire energies on a little bit, weighing eight ounces, and worth less than a dollar. It may thus readily be seen that it is the little bar of metal from which the small tool is made that needs our care and attention.

Importance of the Cutting Tool.—But it is this very fact that makes preparing that part of the mechanism so crucial. Here we have a lathe, weighing a thousand pounds and worth hundreds of dollars, concentrating all its energy on a tiny piece that weighs eight ounces and is worth less than a dollar. It’s clear that the little metal bar from which the small tool is made deserves our care and attention.

This is particularly true of the expensive milling machines, where the little saw, if not in perfect order, and not properly set, will not only do improper work, but injure the machine itself.p. 27 More lathes are ruined from using badly ground tools than from any other cause.

This is especially true for the expensive milling machines, where the small saw, if not in perfect condition and not properly adjusted, won't just perform poorly, but could also damage the machine itself.p. 27 More lathes are ruined by using poorly sharpened tools than for any other reason.

In the whole line of tools which the machinist must take care of daily, there is nothing as important as the lathe cutting-tool, and the knowledge which goes with it to use the proper one.

In the entire lineup of tools that a machinist has to maintain each day, nothing is as crucial as the lathe cutting tool, along with the knowledge needed to choose the right one.

Let us simplify the inquiry by considering them under the following headings:

Let’s simplify the question by looking at them under these headings:

1. The grinder.

The coffee grinder.

2. The grinding angle.

The grinding angle.

The Grinder.—The first mistake the novice will make, is to use the tool on the grinder as though it were necessary to grind it down with a few turns of the wheel. Haste is not conducive to proper sharpening. As the wheel is of emery, corundum or other quickly cutting material, and is always run at a high rate of speed, a great heat is evolved, which is materially increased by pressure.

The Grinder.—The first mistake a beginner makes is treating the tool on the grinder as if it only takes a few turns of the wheel to sharpen it. Rushing doesn't help with proper sharpening. Since the wheel is made of emery, corundum, or other fast-cutting materials and runs at high speeds, it generates a lot of heat, which increases significantly with pressure.

Pressure is injurious not so much to the wheel as to the tool itself. The moment a tool becomes heated there is danger of destroying the temper, and the edge, being the thinnest, is the most violently affected. Hence it is desirable always to have a receptacle with water handy, into which the tool can be plunged, during the process of grinding down.

Pressure is harmful not just to the wheel but to the tool itself. As soon as a tool gets heated, there's a risk of ruining its temper, and since the edge is the thinnest part, it's the most affected. Therefore, it’s important to always keep a container of water nearby, so the tool can be immersed in it during the grinding process.

Correct Use of Grinder.—Treat the wheel asp. 28 though it is a friend, and not an enemy. Take advantage of its entire surface. Whenever you go into a machine shop, look at the emery wheel. If you find it worn in creases, and distorted in its circular outline, you can make up your mind that there is some one there who has poor tools, because it is simply out of the question to grind a tool correctly with such a wheel.

Proper Use of Grinder.—Treat the wheel likep. 28 it’s your friend, not your enemy. Use its entire surface. Whenever you enter a machine shop, check out the emery wheel. If you see that it’s worn with grooves and has a distorted shape, you can be sure someone there is using subpar tools, because it’s impossible to grind a tool properly with a wheel like that.

Fig. 18-23 Hook, Parting, Knife, Right-hand, Internal, Left-hand side Tools. Fig. 18-23. Tools.ToList

Coarse wheels are an abomination for tool work. Use the finest kinds devised for the purpose. They will keep in condition longer, are not so liable to wear unevenly, and will always finish off the edge better than the coarse variety.

Coarse wheels are terrible for tool work. Use the best types designed for the job. They will last longer, are less likely to wear unevenly, and will always give a better finish to the edge than the coarse ones.

Lathe Bits.—All bits made for lathes are modifications of the foregoing types (Figs. 18-23, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23).

Lathe Tools.—All bits designed for lathes are variations of the types mentioned above (Figs. 18-23, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23).

As this chapter deals with the sharpening methods only, the reader is referred to the next chapp. 29ter, which deals with the manner of setting and holding them to do the most effective work.

As this chapter focuses only on sharpening methods, the reader is directed to the next chapp. 29ter, which covers how to set and hold them for optimal performance.

When it is understood that a cutting tool in a lathe is simply a form of wedge which peels off a definite thickness of metal, the importance of proper grinding and correct position in the lathe can be appreciated.

When you realize that a cutting tool in a lathe is just a type of wedge that removes a specific thickness of metal, you can see why proper grinding and the correct positioning in the lathe are so important.

Roughing Tools.—The most useful is the roughing tool to take off the first cut. As this type of tool is also important, with some modifications, in finishing work, it is given the place of first consideration here.

Roughing tools.—The roughing tool is the most useful for making the initial cut. Since this type of tool is also essential, with some adjustments, in finishing work, we will focus on it first.

Fig. 24. Tool for Wrought Iron. Fig. 25. Tool for Cast Iron.
Fig. 24. Tool for Wrought Iron. Fig. 25. Tool for Cast Iron.ToList

Fig. 24 shows side and top views of a tool designed to rough off wrought iron, or a tough quality of steel. You will notice, that what is called the top rake (A) is very pronounced, and, as the point projects considerably above the body of the tool itself, it should, in practice, be set with its cutting point above the center.

Fig. 24 shows side and top views of a tool made for roughing off wrought iron or high-quality steel. You’ll see that the top rake (A) is quite prominent, and since the point extends significantly above the body of the tool, it should be set in practice with its cutting point above the center.

p. 30

The Clearance.—Now, in grinding, the important point is the clearance line (B). As shown in this figure, it has an angle of 10 degrees, so that in placing the tool in the holder it is obvious it cannot be placed very high above the center, particularly when used on small work. The top rake is ground at an angle of 60 degrees from the vertical. The arc of the curved end depends on the kind of lathe and the size of the work.

The Clearing.—Now, when it comes to grinding, the key factor is the clearance line (B). As illustrated in this figure, it has an angle of 10 degrees, meaning that when you put the tool in the holder, it’s clear that it can’t be placed too high above the center, especially when working with small pieces. The top rake is ground at a 60-degree angle from vertical. The curve of the end depends on the type of lathe and the size of the workpiece.

The tool (Fig. 25), with a straight cutting edge, is the proper one to rough off cast iron. Note that the top rake (C) is 70 degrees, and the clearance 15 degrees.

The tool (Fig. 25), with a straight cutting edge, is the right one to rough off cast iron. Note that the top rake (C) is 70 degrees, and the clearance is 15 degrees.

The Cutting Angle.—Wrought iron, or mild steel, will form a ribbon when the tool wedges its way into the material. Cast iron, on the other hand, owing to its brittleness, will break off into small particles, hence the wedge surface can be put at a more obtuse angle to the work.

The Cutting Angle.—Wrought iron, or mild steel, will create a ribbon when the tool digs into the material. Cast iron, however, because it's brittle, will break into small pieces, so the wedge surface can be set at a more obtuse angle to the work.

In grinding side-cutters the clearance should be at a less angle than 10 degrees, rather than more, and the top rake should also be less; otherwise the tendency will be to draw the tool into the work and swing the tool post around.

In grinding side-cutters, the clearance should be at an angle of less than 10 degrees, not more, and the top rake should also be smaller; otherwise, the tool will tend to pull into the work and cause the tool post to swing around.

Drills.—Holders for grinding twist drills are now furnished at very low prices, and instructions are usually sent with the machines, but a few words may not be amiss for the benefit of thosep. 31 who have not the means to purchase such a machine.

Exercises.—Drill holders for grinding twist drills are now available at very affordable prices, and instructions typically come with the machines. However, a few words of advice might be helpful for thosep. 31 who cannot afford to buy such a machine.

Hand grinding is a difficult thing, for the reason that through carelessness, or inability, both sides of the drill are not ground at the same angle and pitch. As a result the cutting edge of one side will do more work than the other. If the heel angles differ, one side will draw into the work, and the other resist.

Hand grinding is tough because, due to carelessness or inability, both sides of the drill are not ground at the same angle and pitch. This results in the cutting edge of one side doing more work than the other. If the heel angles are different, one side will pull into the work, while the other will push against it.

Fig. 26. End view. Fig. 27. Side view.
Fig. 26. End view. Fig. 27. Side view.ToList

Wrong Grinding.—When such is the case the hole becomes untrue. The sides of the bit will grind into the walls, or the bit will have a tendency to run to one side, and particularly if boring through metal which is uneven in its texture or grain.

Incorrect Grinding.—When this happens, the hole becomes inaccurate. The sides of the bit will grind against the walls, or the bit will tend to veer to one side, especially when boring through metal that has an uneven texture or grain.

Figs. 26 and 27 show end and side views of a bit properly ground. If a bit has been broken off, first grind it off square at the end, and then grind down the angles, so that A is about 15 degrees, and be sure that the heel has sufficientp. 32 clearance—that is, ground down deeper than the cutting point.

Figs. 26 and 27 show the end and side views of a properly ground bit. If a bit breaks off, first grind it off square at the end, and then grind down the angles so that A is about 15 degrees, making sure the heel has enoughp. 32 clearance—that is, ground deeper than the cutting point.

Chisels.—A machine shop should always have a plentiful supply of cold chisels, and a particular kind for each work, to be used for that purpose only. This may seem trivial to the boy, but it is really a most important matter.

Chisels.—A machine shop should always have a good supply of cold chisels, with specific types for each job, to be used only for that purpose. This may seem unimportant to a young person, but it's actually a very significant issue.

Notice the careless and incompetent workman. If chipping or cutting is required, he will grasp the first chisel at hand. It may have a curved end, or be a key-way chisel, or entirely unsuited as to size for the cutting required.

Notice the careless and incompetent worker. If chipping or cutting is needed, he will grab the first chisel he sees. It might have a curved end, be a key-way chisel, or just be completely the wrong size for the job.

The result is an injured tool, and unsatisfactory results. The rule holds good in this respect as with every other tool in the kit. Use a tool for the purpose it was made for, and for no other. Acquire that habit.

The result is a damaged tool and disappointing outcomes. This principle applies just like it does to every other tool in the kit. Use a tool for the purpose it was made for, and for nothing else. Get into that habit.

Cold Chisels.—A cold chisel should never be ground to a long, tapering point, like a wood chisel. The proper taper for a wood chisel is 15 degrees, whereas a cold chisel should be 45 degrees. A drifting chisel may have a longer taper than one used for chipping.

Cold chisels.—A cold chisel should never be sharpened to a long, pointed tip like a wood chisel. The correct taper for a wood chisel is 15 degrees, while a cold chisel should have a taper of 45 degrees. A drifting chisel may have a longer taper than one used for chipping.

It is a good habit, particularly as there are so few tools which require grinding, to commence the day's work by grinding the chisels, and arranging them for business.

It's a good habit, especially since there are so few tools that need sharpening, to start the day by sharpening the chisels and getting them ready for work.

System in Work.—Then see to it that the drillsp. 33 are in good shape; and while you are about it, look over the lathe tools. You will find that it is better to do this work at one time, than to go to the emery wheel a dozen times a day while you are engaged on the job.

System in Progress.—Make sure the drillsp. 33 are in good condition; and while you're at it, check the lathe tools too. You'll realize it's more efficient to handle this all at once rather than making numerous trips to the emery wheel throughout the day while you're working on the task.

Adopt a system in your work. Don't take things just as they come along, but form your plans in an orderly way, and you will always know how to take up and finish the work in the most profitable and satisfactory way.

Adopt a system in your work. Don't just take things as they come; instead, create your plans in an organized manner, and you'll always know how to start and complete tasks in the most effective and satisfying way.

Wrong Use of Tools.—Never use the vise as an anvil. Ordinary and proper use of this tool will insure it for a lifetime, aside from its natural wear. It may be said with safety that a vise will never break if used for the purpose for which it was intended. One blow of a hammer may ruin it.

Incorrect Tool Usage.—Never use the vise as an anvil. Using this tool properly will ensure it lasts a lifetime, aside from normal wear. It's safe to say that a vise will never break if used for its intended purpose. Just one blow from a hammer can damage it.

Furthermore, never use an auxiliary lever to screw up the jaws. If the lever which comes with it is not large enough to set the jaws, you may be sure that the vise is not large enough for your work

Furthermore, never use a lever to tighten the jaws. If the lever that comes with it isn’t big enough to adjust the jaws, you can be sure that the vise isn’t big enough for your project.


CHAPTER IIIToC

SETTING AND HOLDING TOOLS

Some simple directions in the holding and setting of tools may be of service to the novice. Practice has shown the most effective way of treating different materials, so that the tools will do the most efficient work.

Some straightforward tips on how to hold and position tools might help beginners. Experience has demonstrated the best methods for working with various materials, ensuring that the tools perform at their best.

A tool ground in a certain way and set at a particular angle might do the work admirably on a piece of steel, but would not possibly work on aluminum or brass.

A tool designed in a specific way and positioned at a certain angle might perform exceptionally well on a piece of steel, but it wouldn't work at all on aluminum or brass.

Lathe Speed.—If the lathe should run at the same speed on a piece of cast iron as with a brass casting, the result would not be very satisfactory, either with the tool or on the work itself.

Spindle Speed.—If the lathe operates at the same speed on a piece of cast iron as it does with a brass casting, the outcome would not be very good, both for the tool and the work itself.

Some compositions of metal require a high speed, and some a hooked tool. These are things which each must determine as the articles come to the shop; but there are certain well-defined rules with respect to the ordinary metals that should be observed.

Some metal compositions need to be processed at a high speed, while others require a hooked tool. These are considerations each person will need to figure out as the materials arrive at the workshop; however, there are specific guidelines regarding common metals that should be followed.

The Hack Saw.—Our first observation should be directed to the hand tools. The hack saw is one of the most difficult tools for the machinist to handle, for the following reasons:p. 35

The Hacksaw.—Our first focus should be on the hand tools. The hack saw is one of the hardest tools for the machinist to use, for the following reasons:p. 35

First, of the desire to force the blade through the work. The blade is a frail instrument, and when too great a pressure is exerted it bends, and as a result a breakage follows. To enable it to do the work properly, it must be made of the hardest steel. It is, in consequence, easily fractured.

First, there's the urge to push the blade through the task. The blade is a delicate tool, and when too much pressure is applied, it bends, leading to a break. For it to perform well, it needs to be made of the toughest steel. As a result, it can easily snap.

Fig. 28.—Hack Saw Frame. Fig. 29.—Hack Saw Blade. Fig. 28.—Hack Saw Frame.
Fig. 29.—Hack Saw Blade.
ToList

Second. The novice will make short hacking cuts. This causes the teeth to stick, the saw bends, and a new blade is required. Take a long sweeping cut, using the entire length of the blade. Do not oscillate the blade as you push it through the work, but keep the tooth line horizontal from one end of the stroke to the other. The moment it begins to waver, the teeth will catch on the metal on the side nearest to you, and it will snap

Second. The beginner will make quick, short cuts. This makes the teeth get stuck, the saw bends, and you'll need a new blade. Instead, take a long, smooth cut, using the full length of the blade. Don’t wiggle the blade as you push it through the material; keep the tooth line straight from one end of the stroke to the other. As soon as it starts to wobble, the teeth will snag on the metal closest to you, and it will break.

p. 36

Third. The handle is held too loosely. The handle must be firmly held with the right hand, and the other held by the fingers lightly, but in such a position that a steady downward pressure can be maintained. If loosely held, the saw is bound to sag from side to side during the stroke, and a short stroke accentuates the lateral movement. A long stroke avoids this.

Third. The handle is held too loosely. You need to grip the handle firmly with your right hand, while the other hand should hold it lightly with your fingers in a position that allows you to keep steady downward pressure. If you hold it loosely, the saw will definitely sway from side to side while you’re cutting, and a short stroke makes the sideways movement worse. A long stroke helps prevent this.

The hack saw is one of the tools which should be used with the utmost deliberation, combined with a rigid grasp of the handle.

The hacksaw is one of the tools that should be used with great care, along with a firm grip on the handle.

Files.—For remarks on this tool see Chapter IV, which treats of the subject specially.

Documents.—For comments on this tool, see Chapter IV, which specifically discusses the topic.

Grindstones, Emery and Grinding Wheels.—A good workman is always reflected by his grinding apparatus. This is true whether it has reference to a grindstone, emery, corundum wheel, or a plain oil stone. Nothing is more destructive of good tools than a grooved, uneven, or wabbly stone. It is only little less than a crime for a workman to hold a tool on a revolving stone at one spot.

Grindstones, emery, and grinding wheels.—A good tradesperson's skills are always evident in their grinding tools. This applies whether it’s a grindstone, emery, corundum wheel, or a simple oil stone. Nothing ruins good tools faster than a grooved, uneven, or unstable stone. It's almost a crime for a worker to keep a tool in one spot on a spinning stone.

Carelessness in Holding Tools.—The boy must learn that such a habit actually prevents the proper grinding, not only of the tool he has on the stone, but also of the one which follows. While it is true that all artificially made grinders will wear unevenly, even when used with the utmost care, due to uneven texture of the materials in the stone, still,p. 37 the careless use of the tool, while in the act of grinding, only aggravates the trouble.

Improper Tool Handling.—The boy needs to understand that this habit actually makes it harder to grind not just the tool he's using, but also the next one. Although it's true that all manufactured grinders can wear unevenly, even with the greatest care, because of the inconsistent materials in the stone, the careless handling of the tool while grinding only makes the problem worse.

Another fault of the careless workman is, to press the bit against the stone too hard. This cuts the stone more than it wears off the tool, and it is entirely unnecessary. Furthermore, it heats up the tool, which should be avoided.

Another mistake of the careless worker is pressing the bit against the stone too hard. This cuts into the stone more than it wears down the tool, and it’s completely unnecessary. Plus, it heats up the tool, which should be avoided.

Calipers.—A true workman, who endeavors to turn out accurate work, and preserve his tools, will never test the work with his calipers while the piece is turning in the lathe. A revolving cast iron disk will cut ruby, the hardest substance next to the diamond, so it is not the hardness of the material which resists wear, but the conditions under which it is used.

Calipers.—A skilled worker who aims to produce precise work and take care of his tools will never use calipers to test the work while it's still spinning on the lathe. A rotating cast iron disk can cut through ruby, which is the hardest material after diamond, so it's not the hardness of the material that prevents wear, but rather the circumstances of how it's used.

Care in Use of Calipers.—The calipers may be of the most hardened steel, and the work turned up of the softest brass, the latter, when revolving, will grind off the point of the tool, for the reason that the revolving piece constantly presents a new surface to the point of the calipers, and when tests are frequently made, it does not take long to change the caliper span so that it must be reset.

Care When Using Calipers.—Calipers can be made from the hardest steel, while the material being measured might be the softest brass. When the brass turns, it can wear down the tip of the calipers because the rotating piece keeps exposing a fresh surface to the calipers' tip. If tests are done often, it doesn’t take long for the caliper span to change, requiring it to be reset.

As stated elsewhere, the whole energy of the lathe is concentrated on the bit or cutting tool, hence, in order to get the most effective work out of it requires care; first, in grinding; and, second, in setting

As mentioned elsewhere, all the energy from the lathe focuses on the bit or cutting tool, so to achieve the best results, it requires attention; first, in grinding, and second, in setting.

p. 38

Machine Bits.—It does not always matter so much whether you use a square, pointed, or a round-nosed bit, provided it is properly ground and set in the tool holder. As a rule, the more brittle the metal the less the top rake or angle should be.

Machine Parts.—It doesn't always matter if you use a flat, pointed, or round bit, as long as it is well-ground and properly placed in the tool holder. Generally, the harder the metal, the smaller the top rake or angle should be.

In the chapter relating to the grinding of tools, references were made as to the most serviceable bits for the various metals. We are concerned here with the setting or holding of these articles.

In the chapter about tool grinding, we discussed the best types of bits for different metals. Here, we're focused on how to set or hold these items.

Fig. 30. Plain Hook Tool Fig. 31. Plain Straight Tool
Fig. 30. Basic Hook Tool Fig. 31. Basic Straight Tool ToList

The two illustrations here given show a pair of plain bits, in which Fig. 30 represents a hook-shaped formation, and Fig. 31 a straight grind, without any top rake. The hooked bit would do for aluminum, or steel, but for cast iron the form shown in Fig. 31 would be most serviceable.

The two illustrations here show a pair of simple bits, where Fig. 30 represents a hook-shaped design, and Fig. 31 a straight grind, with no top rake. The hooked bit would work for aluminum or steel, but for cast iron, the form shown in Fig. 31 would be the most effective.

Then the side bits, such as the round-nosed, Fig. 32 and the square end, Fig. 33, may be ground hooked, or with a top rake, or left flat.

Then the side bits, like the round-nosed, Fig. 32 and the square end, Fig. 33, can be ground hooked, have a top rake, or be left flat.

The too common mistake is to grind the lower or clearance side at too great an angle. Fig. 34p. 39 shows the correct angle, and the dotted line A illustrates the common tendency to grind the clearance.

The common mistake is to grind the lower or clearance side at too steep an angle. Fig. 34p. 39 shows the correct angle, and the dotted line A illustrates the typical tendency to grind the clearance.

The Proper Angle for Lathe Tools.—Now there is a reason why the angle of from 10 to 15 should be maintained in the clearance. The point of the tool must have suitable support for the work it is required to do, so it will not chatter or yield in the slightest degree. A bit ground along the dotted line has a cutting edge which will spring down, and consequently break or produce a rough surface.

The Right Angle for Lathe Tools.—Now, there's a reason why the clearance angle should be kept between 10 to 15 degrees. The tip of the tool needs to have proper support for the task at hand so it won’t chatter or bend even a little. A bit ground along the dotted line has a cutting edge that will flex downward, potentially causing it to break or create a rough surface.

Figs. 32, 33, 34. Proper Angles for Tools Figs. 32, 33, 34.
Correct Angles for Tools
ToList

Then, again, the angle of the clearance acts as a guide, or rather, a guard, to prevent the tool from going in too far, as will now be explained.

Then, again, the angle of the clearance serves as a guide, or rather, a guard, to stop the tool from going in too far, as will now be explained.

Setting the Bit.—In order to understand the correct setting, examine the work A, in Fig. 35.

Setting the Frequency.—To understand the correct setting, take a look at the work A, in Fig. 35.

A is a cylinder being turned up in the lathe, and B the cutting tool, which approaches it on a horip. 40zontal line, C, extending out from the center of the cylinder A. This setting is theoretically correct, and in practice has been found most advantageous.

A is a cylinder being turned on a lathe, and B is the cutting tool, which approaches it on a horizontal line, C, extending out from the center of the cylinder A. This setup is theoretically correct and has proven to be very beneficial in practice.

In this case let us assume that the clearance angle D is 15 degrees, as well as in the following figures.

In this case, let’s assume that the clearance angle D is 15 degrees, just like in the following figures.

Fig. 35. Set of the Bit Fig. 35. Bit SetToList

Suppose we have a piece of tough steel, and the tool holder is raised so that the point of the tool is at the 15 degree line E, as shown in Fig. 36, in which case the clearance line D is at right angles to the line E. The line E is 15 degrees above the center line C.

Suppose we have a piece of tough steel, and the tool holder is raised so that the tip of the tool is at the 15-degree line E, as shown in Fig. 36, in which case the clearance line D is at a right angle to line E. The line E is 15 degrees above the center line C.

The Setting Angle.—Now, it is obvious that if the tool should be raised higher than the line E it would run out of work, because the clearance surface of the tool would ride up over the surface cut by the edge of the tool.

The Setting Angle.—It's clear that if the tool is raised above the line E, it will run out of work because the clearance surface of the tool will go over the surface cut by the tool's edge.

If, on the other hand, the tool should be placed lower, toward the line C, the tendency would be to draw in the tool toward the center of the work A

If the tool is positioned lower, near line C, it would likely pull the tool toward the center of work A.

p. 41

In Fig. 37 the tool has its point elevated, in which case it must be lowered so the point will touch the work nearer the center line C.

In Fig. 37 the tool has its point raised, in which case it must be lowered so the point will touch the work closer to the center line C.

The foregoing arrangement of the tools will be found to be effective where the material is soft and not too tough as with aluminum.

The setup of the tools above will work well when the material is soft and not too tough, like aluminum.

Bad Practice.—Figs. 38 and 39 show illustrations of bad practice which should never be resorted to. Fig. 38 shows the tool, held in a horizontal position, but with its point below the center line C. With any rough metal the tool could not possibly work, except to act as a scraper, and if it should be used in that position on cast iron, the tool itself would soon be useless.

Poor Practice.—Figs. 38 and 39 show illustrations of poor techniques that should never be used. Fig. 38 shows the tool held horizontally, but with its tip below the center line C. With any rough metal, the tool could only function as a scraper, and if it were used this way on cast iron, the tool would quickly become ineffective.

Fig. 36. Correct Angle Fig. 37. Wrong Angle
Fig. 36. Right Angle Fig. 37. Incorrect Angle ToList

Fig. 39 is still worse, and is of no value for any purpose except in polishing brass, where it would be serviceable. It would make a sorry looking job with aluminum. Brass requires a tool with veryp. 42 little top rake, and the point should be set near the center line C.

Fig. 39 is even worse and is only useful for polishing brass, where it might be somewhat effective. It would result in a poor finish on aluminum. Brass needs a tool with very p. 42 little top rake, and the tip should be positioned close to the center line C.

Lathe Speed.—It is often a question at what speeds to run the lathe for different work. If you know the speeds of your lathe at low and high gear, you must also consider the diameter of the work at the cutting point.

Lathe RPM.—It's often questioned at what speeds to operate the lathe for different tasks. If you know the speeds of your lathe in low and high gear, you also need to take into account the diameter of the work at the cutting point.

The rule is to have the bit cut from 15 to 20 feet per minute for wrought iron; from 11 to 18 feet for steel; from 25 to 50 for brass; and from 40 to 50 for aluminum.

The guideline is to cut at a speed of 15 to 20 feet per minute for wrought iron; 11 to 18 feet for steel; 25 to 50 for brass; and 40 to 50 for aluminum.

Fig. 38. Too Low Fig. 39. Improper Set
Fig. 38. Too Low Fig. 39. Wrong Setup ToList

As a result, therefore, if, at low speed, a piece 10 inches in diameter, runs at the proper speed to cut at that distance from the center, it is obvious that a piece 5 inches in diameter should ran twice as fast. This is a matter which time and practice will enable you to judge with a fair degree of accuracy

As a result, if a piece that is 10 inches in diameter is operating at the right speed to cut at that distance from the center, it's clear that a piece that is 5 inches in diameter should run twice as fast. Time and practice will help you evaluate this with a good level of accuracy.

p. 43

Observe this as a maxim: "Slow speed, and quick feed."

Observe this as a principle: "Slow down, and speed up your input."

Boring Tools on Lathe.—The lathe is a most useful tool for boring purposes, better for some work than the drilling machine itself. The work which can be done better on a lathe than on a drilling machine, may be classified as follows:

Lathe Boring Tools.—The lathe is a very handy tool for boring tasks, sometimes even better than a drilling machine. The types of work that can be done more effectively on a lathe than on a drilling machine can be categorized as follows:

1. When straight and true holes are required.

1. When you need straight and accurate holes.

2. In long work, where the lathe is used to turn up the article, and where the drilling can be done at the same time.

2. In lengthy projects, where the lathe is used to shape the item, and where drilling can be done simultaneously.

3. Anything that can be chucked in a lathe.

3. Anything that can be thrown into a lathe.

4. Where the work is long and cannot be fixed in a drilling machine. The long bed of the lathe gives room for holding such work.

4. When the work is long and can't be secured in a drilling machine, the long bed of the lathe provides enough space to hold it.

Fig. 40. Internal Set Fig. 41. Set for Brass
Fig. 40. Internal Setup Fig. 41. Brass Set ToList

The Rake of the Drill.—A boring tool requires some knowledge in setting. It should have a greater top rake than for the outside work, and the cutting edge should also be keener, as a rule

The Drill's Rake.—A boring tool needs some understanding in how to set it up. It should have a larger top rake than for outside work, and the cutting edge should typically be sharper.

p. 44
Fig. 42.—Surface Gage. Fig. 42.—Surface Gauge.ToList

In this class of work the material bored must be understood, as well as in doing outside work.

In this type of job, it's important to understand the material being drilled, as well as when doing outdoor work.

The hooked tool, Fig. 40, is shown to be considerably above the center line, and at that point it will do the most effective cutting on steel. If, on the other hand, brass is operated on there should be nop. 45 top rake, as illustrated in Fig. 41, thus assuring a smooth job.

The hooked tool, Fig. 40, is shown to be significantly above the center line, and at that position, it will cut steel most effectively. However, when working with brass, there should be nop. 45 top rake, as shown in Fig. 41, ensuring a smooth finish.

Laps.—This is a tool which is very useful, particularly for grinding and truing up the cylinders of internal combustion engines, as well as for all kinds of bores of refractory material which cannot be handled with the cutting tool of the lathe.

Laps.—This is a tool that is very helpful, especially for grinding and smoothing the cylinders of internal combustion engines, as well as for various types of bores made from heat-resistant materials that can't be worked on with a lathe's cutting tool.

It is made up of a mandrel or rod of copper, with lead cast about it, and then turned up true, so that it is but the merest trifle larger than the hole it is to true up.

It consists of a copper rod or mandrel, surrounded by cast lead, which is then precisely shaped, making it just slightly larger than the hole it's meant to refine.

Using the Lap.—The roller thus made is turned rapidly in a lathe, and the cylinder to be trued is brought up to it and the roller supplied freely with emery powder and oil. As rapidly as possible the cylinder is worked over on the roller, without forcing it, and also turned, so as to prevent even the weight from grinding it unduly on one side.

Using the app.—The roller created is spun quickly in a lathe, and the cylinder that needs to be smoothed is positioned against it. The roller is generously coated with emery powder and oil. The cylinder is then carefully and quickly worked over the roller, without applying too much pressure, while also being rotated to avoid uneven grinding from its own weight.

More or less of the emery will embed itself in the lead, and thus act as an abrasive. The process is called "lapping."

More or less of the emery will embed itself in the lead, and thus act as an abrasive. The process is called "lapping."

Surface Gages.—Frequently, in laying out, it is necessary to scribe lines at a given distance from some part of the work; or, the conditions are such that a rule, a caliper, or dividers will not permit accurate measurement to be made.

Surface Gauges.—Often, when laying things out, you need to mark lines at a specific distance from a part of the work; or, the situation is such that a ruler, caliper, or dividers won’t allow for precise measurement.

For such purposes, what is called a surface gage was devised. This is merely a heavy base, provided p. 46 with a pivoted upright on which is mounted a scribe that is held by a clamp so it may be turned to any angle.

For this purpose, what’s known as a surface gauge was created. It’s basically a heavy base, equipped p. 46 with a pivoted upright that holds a scribe, which is secured by a clamp so it can be adjusted to any angle.

p. 47
Fig. 43.—Showing uses of the Surface Gage. Fig. 43.—Demonstrating the uses of the Surface Gage. ToList

Surface Gage.—The clamp holding the scriber is vertically movable on the pivoted upright. By resting the base of the surface gage on the line to be measured from, and swinging one point of the scriber to the place where the work is to be done, accuracy is assured. One end of the scriber is bent, so it can be adapted to enter recesses, or such places as could not be reached by the straight end

Surface Gauge.—The clamp that holds the scriber can be moved up and down on the pivoted upright. By placing the base of the surface gage on the line you want to measure from and swinging one end of the scriber to the location where you need to work, you can ensure accuracy. One end of the scriber is bent, allowing it to fit into recesses or areas that wouldn’t be accessible with the straight end.


CHAPTER IVToC

ON THE USE OF THE FILE

The most necessary tool in a machine shop is a file. It is one of the neglected tools, because the ordinary boy, or workman, sees nothing in it but a strip or a bar with a lot of cross grooves and edges, and he concludes that the only thing necessary is to rub it across a piece of metal until he has worn it down sufficiently for the purpose.

The most essential tool in a machine shop is a file. It's one of the overlooked tools because the average young person or worker sees it just as a strip or bar with lots of grooves and edges. They think that all that's needed is to drag it across a piece of metal until it wears down enough for the job.

The First Test.—The fact is, the file is so familiar a tool, that it breeds contempt, like many other things closely associated in life.

The First Test.—The truth is, the file is such a common tool that it leads to a lack of respect, just like many other things we frequently encounter in life.

Give the boy an irregular block of metal, and tell him to file it up square, and he will begin to realize that there is something in the handling of a file that never before occurred to him.

Give the boy an uneven piece of metal and instruct him to file it down to make it square, and he will start to understand that there's a technique to using a file that he never noticed before.

He will find three things to astonish him:

He will discover three things that will amaze him:

First: That of dimensions.

Dimensions.

Second: The difficulty of getting it square.

Second: The challenge of making it straight.

Third: The character of the surface when he has finished it.

Third: The quality of the surface once he has finished it.

Filing an Irregular Block.—To file a block of an irregular character so that the dimensions are accurate, is a good test for an accomplished workman. The job is made doubly difficult if he is required to file it square at the same time. It willp. 49 be found, invariably, that the sides will not be parallel, and by the time it is fully trued up the piece will be too small. See Figs. 44 and 45.

Submitting an Irregular Block.—Filing a block with an irregular shape while keeping the dimensions precise is a great test for a skilled worker. The task becomes even more challenging if he has to file it square at the same time. It willp. 49 usually be the case that the sides won’t be parallel, and by the time it’s properly squared up, the piece will be too small. See Figs. 44 and 45.

Then, unless the utmost care is taken, the flat sides will not be flat, but rounded.

Then, unless the utmost care is taken, the flat sides won't be flat, but rounded.

Filing a Bar Straight.—The next test is to get the boy to file a bar straight. He has no shaper or planer for the purpose, so that it must be done by hand. He will find himself lacking in two things: The edge of the bar will not be straight; nor will it be square with the side of the bar.

Filing a Straight Bar.—The next test is to have the boy file a bar straight. He doesn’t have a shaper or planer for this, so it has to be done by hand. He will notice two main issues: the edge of the bar won’t be straight, and it won’t be square with the side of the bar.

Fig. 44. Rounded Surface Fig. 37. Wrong Angle
Fig. 44. Curved Surface Fig. 45. A Curvy Face ToList

Filing Bar with Parallel Sides.—Follow up this test by requiring him to file up a bar, first, with two exactly parallel sides, and absolutely straight, so it will pass smoothly between the legs of a pair of calipers, and then file the two other sides in like manner.

Filing bar with parallel sides.—Next, have him file a bar with two perfectly parallel sides that are completely straight, allowing it to fit smoothly between the legs of a pair of calipers, and then have him file the other two sides in the same way.

Surfacing off Disks.—When the foregoing are completed there is still another requirement which, though it appears simple, is the supreme test. Set him to work at surfacing off a pair of disks or plates, say one and a half inches in diameter, sop. 50 that when they are finished they will fit against each other perfectly flat.

Surfacing from discs.—When the previous tasks are done, there's one more requirement that, despite seeming straightforward, is the ultimate challenge. Have him work on surfacing a pair of disks or plates, around one and a half inches in diameter, sop. 50 that when they're done, they will fit together perfectly flat.

A pair of such disks, if absolutely true, will hold together by the force of cohesion, even in a dry state, or they will, as it were, float against each other.

A pair of such disks, if perfectly aligned, will stick together because of the force of cohesion, even when dry, or they will, in a way, repel each other.

True Surfacing.—Prior to about 1850 the necessity of true surfacing was not so important or as well known as at the present time. About that period Sir J. Whitworth, an eminent English engineer and mechanic, called the attention of machinists to the great advantage arising from true surfaces and edges for all types of machinery, and he laid the foundation of the knowledge in accurating surfacing.

True Surfacing.—Before around 1850, the importance of true surfacing wasn't as recognized or emphasized as it is today. Around that time, Sir J. Whitworth, a notable English engineer and mechanic, highlighted the significant benefits of having true surfaces and edges for all kinds of machinery, and he established the groundwork for understanding accurate surfacing.

Precision Tools.—Due to his energy many precision tools were made, all tending to this end, and as a result machines became better and more efficient in every way.

Precision Tools.—Because of his energy, many precision tools were created, all aimed at this goal, and as a result, machines improved and became more efficient in every way.

It had this great advantage: It taught the workman of his day how to use the file and scraper, because both must be used conjunctively to make an absolutely flat plate.

It had a huge advantage: It taught the workers of its time how to use the file and scraper together, since both tools are needed to create a perfectly flat plate.

Contrary to general beliefs, shapers and planers do not make absolutely accurate surfaces. The test of this is to put together two plates so planed off. There is just enough unevenness to permit air to get between the plates. If they were perfectly truep. 51 they would exclude all air, and it would be a difficult matter to draw them apart.

Contrary to popular belief, shapers and planers do not create perfectly smooth surfaces. The proof of this is when you put together two planed plates. There’s just enough bumpiness to allow air to get between them. If they were completely flatp. 51, they would block all air, making it really hard to pull them apart.

Test of the Mechanic.—To make them perfectly flat, one plate has chalk rubbed over it, and the two plates are then rubbed together. This will quickly show where the high spots are, and the file and scraper are then used to cut away the metal.

Mechanic Test.—To make them perfectly flat, one plate is coated with chalk, and then the two plates are rubbed against each other. This quickly reveals the high points, and a file and scraper are used to remove the excess metal.

Fig. 46. Hexagon Nut Fig. 47. Hexagon Nut
Fig. 46. Hex Nut Fig. 47. Hex Nut ToList

In England the test of the mechanic used to be determined by his ability to file a piece of metal flat. It was regarded as the highest art. This is not the most desirable test at the present time, and it is recognized that a much severer test is to file a narrow piece exactly flat, and so that it will not have a trace of roundness, and be square from end to end.

In England, a mechanic's skill used to be judged by how well they could file a piece of metal flat. It was seen as the highest form of craft. Nowadays, this isn't the best way to assess skill, and it's understood that a far tougher test is to file a narrow piece perfectly flat, so that it shows no signs of roundness and is square from one end to the other.

Test Suggestions.—In a shop which does not have the advantage of a planer or shaper, therep. 52 are so many articles which must be filed up, that it is interesting to know something of how the various articles are made with a file.

Test Ideas.—In a workshop without a planer or shaper, therep. 52 are numerous items that need to be shaped, making it worthwhile to understand how different articles can be crafted using a file.

To file a hexagon, or six-sided nut will be a good test with a file. To do this a little study in geometrical lines will save a vast amount of time. In beginning the work, measure the radius with a divider, and then step off and make six marks equidistant from each other on the round surface.

To file a hexagon, or a six-sided nut, is a good way to test your skills with a file. A bit of study in geometric lines will save you a lot of time. When starting the work, use a divider to measure the radius, then mark off six points that are evenly spaced around the circular surface.

Fig. 48. Cutting Key-way Fig. 48. Cutting KeywayToList

Use of the Dividers.—The distance between each of these points is equal to the radius, or half the diameter, of the round bar. See Fig. 46, which shows this. The marks should be scribed across the surface, as shown in Fig. 47, where the lines show the ends of the facets of the outside of the nut.

Using the Dividers.—The distance between each of these points is equal to the radius, or half the diameter, of the round bar. See Fig. 46, which illustrates this. The marks should be etched across the surface, as shown in Fig. 47, where the lines indicate the ends of the facets on the outside of the nut.

Do not let the file obliterate the lines at the roughp. 53 cutting, but leave enough material so you can make a good finish at the line.

Do not let the file erase the lines at the roughp. 53 cutting, but leave enough material so you can achieve a smooth finish at the line.

Cutting a Key-way.—Another job you may have frequent occasion to perform, is to cut a way for a key in a shaft and in a wheel hub. Naturally, this will be first roughed out with a cold chisel narrower than the key is to be, and also slightly shallower than the dimensions of the key.

Cutting a keyway.—Another task you might often need to do is to create a slot for a key in a shaft and in a wheel hub. Typically, this will first be roughly carved out with a cold chisel that is narrower than the key will be and also a bit shallower than the key's dimensions.

A flat file should be used for the purpose, first a heavy rough one, for the first cutting. The better way is to have the key so it can be frequently tried while the filing process is going on, so that to fit the key in this way is a comparatively easy task.

A flat file should be used for this purpose. Start with a heavy, rough one for the initial cuts. The best approach is to have the key available so you can frequently test it while filing. This way, fitting the key becomes a relatively easy task.

Key-way Difficulties.—But the trouble commences when the groove is filed for the depth. Invariably, the mistake will be made of filing the width first, so the key will fit in. As a result, in deepening the groove the file will contact with the walls, and you have a key-way too wide for the key.

Keyway Challenges.—But the problem starts when you file the groove for depth. People often make the mistake of filing the width first, so the key fits in. Consequently, when deepening the groove, the file will hit the walls, resulting in a key-way that’s too wide for the key.

To avoid this, file the depth, or nearly so, and then with a fine file cut in the corners in the direction indicated by the dart, Fig. 48.

To prevent this, file down to the right depth, or close to it, and then use a fine file to cut into the corners in the direction shown by the dart, Fig. 48.

A proper key is square in cross section. In such a case the depth of the key-way, at each side wall, is just half the width of the key-way.

A proper key has a square cross-section. In this case, the depth of the keyway at each side wall is exactly half the width of the keyway.

An excellent key-seat rule can be made by filingp. 54 out two right-angled pieces, as shown in Fig. 49, which can be attached to the ordinary six-inch metal rule, and this will enable you to scribe the line accurately for the key-way on the shaft.

An excellent key-seat rule can be made by filing out two right-angled pieces, as shown in Fig. 49, which can be attached to a standard six-inch metal ruler. This will help you accurately mark the line for the keyway on the shaft.

Fig. 49. Key-seat Rule Fig. 49. Key seat
Fig. 50. Filing Metal Round Fig. 51. Filing Metal Round
Fig. 50. Fig. 51. ToList
Metal Round Filing

Filing Metal Round.—It is sometimes necessary to file a piece of metal round. This is a hard job, particularly where it is impossible to scribe the end of the piece. Suppose it is necessary to file up a bearing surface, or surfaces, intermediate the ends of a square bar.

Metal Round Filing.—Sometimes, you need to file a piece of metal into a rounded shape. This can be a tough task, especially when you can’t mark the end of the piece. For example, if you need to file a bearing surface or surfaces between the ends of a square bar.

You have in that case four sides to start from,p. 55 the opposite sides being parallel with each other, so that you will have two dimensions, and four equal sides, as shown in Fig. 50.

You have four sides to begin with in that case,p. 55 with the opposite sides parallel to each other, giving you two dimensions and four equal sides, as shown in Fig. 50.

The first step will be to file off accurately the four corners 1, 2, 3, 4, so as to form eight equal sides or faces, as shown in Fig. 51. If you will now proceed to file down carefully the eight corners, so as to make sixteen sides, as in Fig. 52, the fourth set of corners filed down will make the filed part look like the illustration Fig. 53 with thirty-two faces.

The first step is to accurately file down the four corners 1, 2, 3, 4, to create eight equal sides or faces, as shown in Fig. 51. Next, carefully file down the eight corners to form sixteen sides, as in Fig. 52. The fourth set of filed corners will make the shaped part look like the illustration Fig. 53 with thirty-two faces.

Fig. 52. Making a Bar Round Fig. 53. Making a Bar Round
Fig. 52. Fig. 53.
Making a Round Bar ToList

This may be further filed down into sixty-four faces, and a few cuts of the finishing file will take off the little ridges which still remain. By using emery cloth, and wrapping it around the bearing portion, and changing it continually, while drawingp. 56 it back and forth, will enable you to make a bearing which, by care, will caliper up in good shape.

This can be further shaped into sixty-four faces, and a few passes with a finishing file will remove the small ridges that are still left. By using emery cloth wrapped around the bearing area and switching it out often while moving it back and forth, you can create a bearing that, with care, will measure well.

Kinds of Files.—Each file has five distinct properties; namely: the length, the contour, the form in cross section, the kind of teeth, and the fineness of the teeth.

Types of Files.—Each file has five different properties: the length, the shape, the cross-section, the type of teeth, and the coarseness of the teeth.

There are nine well-defined shapes for files. These may be enumerated as follows:

There are nine clear types of files. They can be listed as follows:

Fig. 54. Cross Sections of Files. Fig. 54. Cross Sections of Files.ToList

No. 1. The cotter file. The small kind is called a verge or pivot file.

No. 1. The cotter file. The small one is referred to as a verge or pivot file.

No. 2. Square file, which may be tapering from end to end, or have parallel sides throughout.

No. 2. Square file, which may be tapered from end to end or have parallel sides all the way through.

No. 3. Watch pinion file. This may have its sides parallel or tapering, to make a knife-shaped file.

No. 3. Watch pinion file. This may have its sides parallel or tapered, to create a knife-shaped file.

No. 4. Clock-pinion; which may be used for either nicking, piecing, or squaring-off purposes.

No. 4. Clock-pinion; which can be used for nicking, piecing, or squaring-off purposes.

No. 5. Round, with parallel sides for gulleting purposes, or rat-tail when it tapers.

No. 5. Round, with straight sides for cutting purposes, or rat-tail when it narrows.

No. 6. Triangular, or three equally-sided body for saw filing. p. 57

No. 6. Triangular or three equal-sided shape for sharpening saws. p. 57

No. 7. Equalizing file. This is parallel when used for making clock-pinions or endless screws; or for slitting, entering, warding, or making barrel holes, when the body of the file tapers.

No. 7. Equalizing file. This is straight when used for making clock pinions or endless screws; or for slitting, entering, warding, or making barrel holes, when the body of the file tapers.

No. 8. Cross, or double-round, half-file.

No. 8. Cross or double-round half-file.

No. 9. Slitting file; which has parallel sides only. A cant file.

No. 9. Slitting file; which has straight sides only. A cant file.

Character of the File Tooth.—Files are distinguished principally by the character of the oblique, or cross grooves and ridges which do the cutting and abrading when the file is drawn across the surface.

Character of the File Tooth.—Files are mainly distinguished by the nature of the angled or cross grooves and ridges that perform the cutting and abrasion when the file is pulled across a surface.

This is really more important than the shape, because the files, by their cuttings, are adapted for the various materials which they are to be used upon.

This is actually more important than the shape, because the files, through their different cuts, are designed for the various materials they will be used on.

The files are classified as Double Cut, of which there are the rough, middle, bastard, second cut, smooth, and dead smooth.

The files are categorized as Double Cut, which include the rough, middle, bastard, second cut, smooth, and dead smooth.

The Float Cut, which is either rough, bastard or smooth; and

The Float Cut, which is either rough, bastard, or smooth; and

The Rasp Cut, either rough, bastard or smooth.

The Rasp Cut, either rough, bastard, or smooth.

Several types are illustrated in Fig. 55, which show the characteristics of the various cuts.

Several types are shown in Fig. 55, which highlight the features of the different cuts.

The rasps are used principally for soft material, such as wood or for hoofs, in horse shoeing, hence they need not be considered in connection with machine-shop work

The rasps are mainly used for soft materials, like wood or for hoofs during horseshoeing, so they don’t need to be factored into machine-shop work.

p. 58
Fig. 55. Files. Fig. 55. Files.ToList ToList
p. 59

Holding the File.—The common mistake on the part of the beginner is to drag the file across the work at an angle. The body of the file should move across straight and not obliquely.

Holding the file.—A typical mistake beginners make is dragging the file across the work at an angle. The file should be moved straight across, not at an angle.

Note this movement in Fig. 56 where the dash shows the correct movement of the file with relation to the work. Also observe that the file cutting ridges are not straight across the file, but at an angle to the direction of the dart.

Note this movement in Fig. 56 where the dash indicates the correct movement of the file in relation to the work. Also, notice that the file cutting ridges aren't straight across the file, but angled relative to the direction of the dart.

Fig. 56. Correct File Movement Fig. 56. Proper File TransferToList

Injuring Files.—Now the frequent practice is to use the file as shown in Fig. 57, in which case it is moved across obliquely. The result is that the angle of the file cut is so disposed that the teeth of the file do not properly aid in the cutting, but in a measure retard the operation.

Injured Files.—Nowadays, it's common to use the file as shown in Fig. 57, where it's moved at an angle. This causes the angle of the file cut to be such that the teeth of the file don't effectively assist in cutting and actually slow down the process.

File teeth are disposed at an angle for the purp. 60pose of giving them a shearing cut, which is the case when the file moves across the work on a line with its body.

File teeth are set at an angle to create a shearing cut, which happens when the file moves across the work in line with its body.

To use a file as shown in Fig. 57 injures the file without giving it an opportunity to cut as fast as it would when properly used.

To use a file as shown in Fig. 57 damages the file without allowing it to cut as efficiently as it would when used correctly.

Fig. 57. Incorrect File Movement Fig. 57. Wrong File Transfer ToList

Drawing Back the File.—In drawing back a file it is always better to allow it to drag over the work than to raise it up. It is frequently the case that some of the material will lodge in the teeth, and the back lash will serve to clear out the grooves.

Retracting the File.—When pulling back a file, it's generally better to let it slide over the work rather than lifting it up. Often, some material gets caught in the teeth, and the back motion helps to clear out the grooves.

This is particularly true in filing copper, aluminum, lead, and like metals, but it is well to observe this in all cases

This is especially true when working with copper, aluminum, lead, and similar metals, but it's good to keep this in mind in all situations.


CHAPTER VToC

HOW TO COMMENCE WORK

The question is often asked: Where and how shall the novice commence work?

The question is often asked: Where and how should the beginner start working?

When the shop is equipped, or partially so, sufficient, at least, to turn out simple jobs, the boy will find certain tools which are strangers to him. He must become acquainted with them and not only learn their uses, but how to use them to the best advantage.

When the shop is set up, or at least partially, enough to handle basic tasks, the boy will discover some tools that are unfamiliar to him. He needs to get to know them and not only learn how they work but also how to use them effectively.

Familiarity with Tools.—Familiarity with the appearance of tools, and seeing them in the hands of others will not be of any value. Nothing but the immediate contact with the tool will teach how to use it.

Using Tools.—Knowing what tools look like and watching others use them won’t really help. Only by actually using the tool yourself will you learn how to operate it.

File Practice.—The file is a good tool to pick up first. Select a piece of metal, six or eight inches long, and follow the instructions laid down in the chapter relating to the use of the file.

File Practice.—The file is a useful tool to start with. Choose a piece of metal, six or eight inches long, and follow the instructions in the chapter about using the file.

Practice with several kinds and with different varieties of material will soon give an inkling of the best kind to use with the metal you have. Use the straight edge and the square while the filing process is going on, and apply them frequently,p. 62 to show you what speed you are making and how nearly true you are surfacing up the piece.

Practicing with various types and different materials will quickly give you a sense of the best one to use with the metal you have. While filing, use a straight edge and a square regularlyp. 62 to check your progress and see how accurately you're shaping the piece.

Using the Dividers.—Then try your hand using the dividers, in connection with a centering punch. As an example, take two pieces of metal, each about a foot long, and set the dividers to make a short span, say an inch or so, and step off the length of one piece of metal, and punch the last mark. Then do likewise with the other piece of metal, and see how nearly alike the two measurements are by comparing them.

Using the Separators.—Now give it a shot using the dividers along with a centering punch. For example, take two metal pieces, each about a foot long, and set the dividers to create a short span, maybe an inch or so. Mark the length of one piece of metal, and punch the last mark. Then do the same with the other piece of metal and check how similar the two measurements are by comparing them.

You will find a variation in the lengths of the two measurements at the first trials, and very likely will not be able to make the two pieces register accurately after many trials, even when using the utmost care.

You’ll notice a difference in the lengths of the two measurements during the first trials, and it’s quite possible you won’t be able to get the two pieces to match up accurately after several attempts, even if you are extremely careful.

Sooner or later you will learn that you have not stepped paths along the two bars which were exactly straight, and this will account for the variations. In order to be accurate a line should be drawn along each piece of metal, and the dividers should step off the marks on that line.

Sooner or later, you'll realize that you haven't walked along the two bars that were completely straight, and this will explain the differences. To be accurate, a line should be drawn along each piece of metal, and the dividers should measure off the marks on that line.

Finding Centers.—By way of further experiment, it might be well to find the exact center of the ends of a square bar, putting in the punch marks and then mounting it in the lathe centers to see how accurately this has been done.

Finding Hubs.—As a further experiment, it would be useful to locate the precise center of the ends of a square bar, make punch marks, and then set it up in the lathe centers to check how accurately this has been done.

If either end is out of true the punch marks canp. 63 be corrected by inclining the punch, so that when it is struck it will move over the point in the direction of its true center. This may be followed up by centering the end of a round bar so as to make it true. This will be found to be a more difficult job, unless you have a center head, a tool made for that purpose.

If either end is misaligned, the punch marks canp. 63 be fixed by tilting the punch, so that when you hit it, it will slide over the point toward its true center. After that, you can center the end of a round bar to make it straight. This will be a more challenging task, unless you have a center head, which is a tool designed for that purpose.

It is good practice, however, to make trials of all this work, as it will enable you to judge of measurements. It can be done with the dividers by using care in scribing the centers.

It’s a good idea to test all this work, as it will help you evaluate the measurements. You can do this with dividers, being careful when marking the centers.

Hack-Saw Practice.—Practice with the hack-saw should be indulged in frequently. Learn to make a straight cut through a bar. Try to do this without using a square to guide you. One of the tests of a good mechanic is ability to judge a straight cut.

Hack-Saw Training.—You should practice with the hack-saw regularly. Learn how to make a straight cut through a bar. Try to do this without a square to guide you. One of the signs of a skilled mechanic is the ability to make a straight cut by eye.

The following plan is suggested as a test for the eye. Use a bar of iron or steel one inch square, and make a cut an eighth of an inch deep across it; then turn it around a quarter, so as to expose the nest face, and continue the cut along the side, the same depth, and follow this up with the remaining two sides, and see how near the end of the first cut and the finish cut come together. The test will surprise you.

The following plan is suggested as a test for the eye. Use a bar of iron or steel that's one inch square, and make a cut that's an eighth of an inch deep across it; then rotate it a quarter turn to expose the next side, and continue the cut along that side to the same depth, then do the same for the remaining two sides, and check how close the end of the first cut is to the finish cut. The test will surprise you.

Cutting Metals True.—When you saw off the end of such a bar for trial purposes, use a square,p. 64 after the cut is made, and note how much it is out of true in both directions. It is a curious fact that most mechanics are disposed to saw or cut crooked in one direction, either to the right or to the left. In tests made it is found that this defect is persisted in.

Cutting Metals for Real.—When you saw off the end of a bar to test it, use a square,p. 64 and after the cut is made, check how much it is out of alignment in both directions. Interestingly, most mechanics tend to saw or cut crookedly in one direction, either to the right or to the left. Tests have shown that this flaw continues to occur.

It is practice only which will remedy this, and it would be well for the boy to learn this for himself as early in his career as possible, and correct the tendency to veer in either direction.

It’s only practice that will fix this, and it would be good for the boy to realize this for himself as early in his journey as possible, and to correct the tendency to sway in either direction.

The test of sawing around a round bar is also commended. After a few trials you will be surprised to see how your judgment will improve in practice.

The practice of sawing around a round bar is also recommended. After a few attempts, you'll be surprised at how much your skills will improve in real-life scenarios.

Lathe Work.—Learn the uses of the chuck. As you have, probably, economized as much as possible, a universal chuck is not available, hence the first experience will be with an independent chuck, where the three dogs move independently of each other. This will give you some work to learn how you can get the job true.

Lathe Machining.—Learn the uses of the chuck. Since you've likely saved as much as you can, a universal chuck isn't available, so your first experience will be with an independent chuck, where the three dogs move separately from one another. This will give you some practice in figuring out how to ensure the job is accurate.

Now, before attempting to cut the material, thoroughly learn all the parts of the feed mechanism, and how to reverse, as well as to cross feed. Learn the operation of the operative parts so that your hand will instinctively find them, while the eye is on the work.

Now, before you start cutting the material, make sure you fully understand all the components of the feed mechanism, including how to reverse and cross-feed. Get familiar with how the working parts operate so that your hand can instinctively locate them while your eyes stay focused on the work.

First Steps.—See to it that your tools are sharp,p. 65 and at the first trials make light cuts. Practice the feeds by manually moving the tool holder, for surface cutting as well as for cross cutting.

First Steps.—Make sure your tools are sharp,p. 65 and during your initial attempts, make light cuts. Practice the feeds by manually adjusting the tool holder, both for surface cutting and for cross cutting.

Setting the Tool.—Set the cutting tool at various angles, and try the different tools, noting the peculiarities of each, at the different speeds. Do not, by any means, use refractory metals for your first attempt. Mild steel is a good test, and a light gray iron is admirable for practice lessons.

Setting up the tool.—Adjust the cutting tool to different angles and experiment with the various tools, paying attention to the unique features of each one at various speeds. Avoid using hard metals for your first attempt. Mild steel is a good material for testing, and light gray iron works well for practice lessons.

Metals Used.—Brass is good for testing purposes, but the difficulty is that the tendency of the boy, at first, is to try to do the work too rapidly, and brass encourages this tendency. Feed slowly and regularly until you can make an even finish.

Metals Being Used.—Brass is useful for testing, but the challenge is that initially, the boy tends to work too quickly, and brass promotes this habit. Feed slowly and steadily until you can achieve a smooth finish.

Then chuck and re-chuck to familiarize yourself with every operative part of the lathe, and never try to force the cutting tool. If it has a tendency to run into the work, set it higher. If, on the other hand, you find, in feeding, that it is hard to move the tool post along, the tool is too high, and should be lowered.

Then chuck and re-chuck to get to know every working part of the lathe, and never try to force the cutting tool. If it tends to dig into the work, raise it higher. However, if you find it difficult to move the tool post as you feed it, the tool is too high and needs to be lowered.

The Four Important Things.—Constant practice of this kind will soon enable you to feel instinctively when the tool is doing good work. While you are thus experimenting do not forget the speed. This will need your attention.

The Four Key Things.—Regular practice like this will quickly help you sense when the tool is working well. While you're experimenting, don't overlook the speed. You'll need to pay attention to that.

Remember, you have several things to think about in commencing to run the lathe, all of whichp. 66 will take care of themselves when it becomes familiar to you. These may be enumerated as follows:

Remember, there are a few things to consider when you start using the lathe, but all of thesep. 66 will manage themselves once you get the hang of it. Here’s a list of them:

First: The kind of tool best to use.

First: The best type of tool to use.

Second: Its proper set, to do the best work.

Second: Its proper setup, to do the best work.

Third: The speed of the work in the lathe.

Third: The speed of the work on the lathe.

Fourth: The feed, or the thickness of the cut into the material.

Fourth: The feed, or how thick the cut is into the material.

Turning up a Cylinder.—The first and most important work is to turn up a small cylinder to a calipered dimension. When it is roughed down ready for the finish cut, set the tool so it will take off a sufficient amount to prevent the caliper from spanning it, and this will enable you to finish it off with emery paper, or allow another small cut to be taken.

Turning a Cylinder.—The first and most important task is to shape a small cylinder to the measured size. Once it's roughly shaped and ready for the final cut, adjust the tool to remove enough material so the caliper can't span it. This will let you finish it with emery paper, or make another small cut if needed.

Turning Grooves.—Then follow this up by turning in a variety of annular grooves of different depths and widths; and also V-shaped grooves, the latter to be performed by using both the longitudinal and transverse feeds. This will give you excellent practice in using both hands simultaneously.

Turning Tracks.—Next, create a range of circular grooves with varying depths and widths, along with V-shaped grooves, which you should achieve by using both the longitudinal and transverse feeds. This will provide great practice in using both hands at the same time.

The next step would be to turn out a bore and fit a mandrel into it. This will give you the opportunity to use the caliper to good advantage, and will test your capacity to use them for inside as well as for outside work

The next step would be to make a hole and fit a mandrel into it. This will give you the chance to use the caliper effectively and will test your ability to use it for both inside and outside measurements.

p. 67

Discs.—A job that will also afford good exercise is to turn up a disc with a groove in its face, and then chuck and turn another disk with an annular rib on its face to fit into the groove. This requires delicacy of measurement with the inside as well as the outside calipers.

Discs.—A task that will provide a good workout is to shape a disc with a groove on its surface, and then hold and shape another disc with a raised ring on its surface to fit into the groove. This needs careful measurement with both inside and outside calipers.

The groove should be cut first, and the measurement taken from that, as it is less difficult to handle and set the tool for the rib than for the groove.

The groove should be cut first, and then the measurement should be taken from that, as it's easier to manage and set the tool for the rib than for the groove.

Lathe Speeds.—Do not make the too common mistake of running the mandrel at high speeds in your initial tests. It is far better to use a slow speed, and take a heavy cut. This is good advice at all times, but it is particularly important with beginners

Lathe Speeds.—Don't make the common mistake of operating the mandrel at high speeds during your initial tests. It's much better to use a slow speed and take a heavy cut. This advice is useful all the time, but it's especially important for beginners.


CHAPTER VIToC

ILLUSTRATING SOME OF THE FUNDAMENTAL DEVICES

There are numerous little devices and shop expedients which are desirable, and for which the boy will find uses as he progresses.

There are many small tools and shop tricks that are useful, and the boy will find ways to use them as he moves forward.

We devote this chapter to hints of this kind, all of which are capable of being turned out or utilized at various stages.

We dedicate this chapter to these kinds of hints, all of which can be applied or used at different stages.

Lacing Belts.—To properly lace a belt is quite an art, as many who have tried it know. If a belt runs off the pulley it is attributable to one of three causes: either the pulleys are out of line or the shafts are not parallel or the belt is laced so it makes the belt longer at one margin than the other.

Lacing belts.—Lacing a belt correctly is a skill, as many people who have attempted it can attest. If a belt comes off the pulley, it’s usually due to one of three reasons: either the pulleys are misaligned, the shafts aren't parallel, or the belt is laced in a way that makes one side longer than the other.

In Fig. 58 the lacing should commence at the center hole (A) of one belt end and lace outwardly, terminating at the hole (B) in the center of the other belt end, as shown in Fig. 58.

In Fig. 58, the lacing should start at the center hole (A) of one end of the belt and lace outwards, finishing at hole (B) in the center of the other end of the belt, as shown in Fig. 58.

In Fig. 59 the lacing commences at A, and terminates at the hole (B) at the edge. This will be ample for all but the widest belts.

In Fig. 59 the lacing starts at A and ends at the hole (B) at the edge. This will be enough for all but the widest belts.

Fig. 60 is adapted for a narrow belt. The lacing commences at one margin hole (A), and terminates at the other margin hole (Z)

Fig. 60 is designed for a narrow belt. The lacing starts at one edge hole (A) and ends at the other edge hole (Z).

p. 69

Fig. 61 shows the outside of the belt.

Fig. 61 shows the outside of the belt.

Fig. 62. Gears.—This is something every boy ought to know about. Fig. 62 shows a pair of intermeshing bevel gears. This is the correct term for a pair when both are of the same diameter.

Fig. 62. Gears.—This is something every guy should know about. Fig. 62 shows a pair of interlocking bevel gears. This is the right term for a pair when both are the same size.

Miter Gears.—In Fig. 63 we have a pair of miter gears, one being larger than the other. Remember this distinction.

Bevel Gears.—In Fig. 63 we have a pair of miter gears, with one being bigger than the other. Keep this difference in mind.

Fig. 64. Crown Wheel.—This is a simple manner of transmitting motion from one shaft to another, when the shafts are at right angles, or nearly so, without using bevel or miter gears.

Fig. 64. Crown Gear.—This is a straightforward way to transfer motion from one shaft to another when the shafts are at right angles or close to it, without needing bevel or miter gears.

Fig. 65. Grooved Friction Gearing.—Two grooved pulleys, which fit each other accurately, will transmit power without losing too much by friction. The deeper the grooves the greater is the loss by friction.

Fig. 65. Grooved friction gears.—Two grooved pulleys that fit together perfectly will transfer power with minimal loss due to friction. The deeper the grooves, the greater the friction loss.

Fig. 66. A Valve Which Closes by the Water Pressure.—The bibb has therein a movable valve on a horizontal stem, the valve being on the insidep. 70 of the seat. The stem of the handle has at its lower end a crank bend, which engages with the outer end of the valve stem. When the handle is turned in either direction the valve is unseated. On releasing the handle the pressure of the water against the valve seats it.

Fig. 66. A Valve That Closes with Water Pressure.—The faucet has a movable valve on a horizontal stem, with the valve located on the insidep. 70 of the seat. The handle's stem has a crank at the bottom that connects to the outer end of the valve stem. When you turn the handle in either direction, the valve opens. When you let go of the handle, the water pressure pushes the valve back into place.

Fig. 67. Cone Pulleys.—Two cone pulleys of equal size and taper provide a means whereby a change in speed can be transmitted from one shaft to another by merely moving the belt to and fro. The slightest change is available by this means.

Fig. 67. Cone Pulleys.—Two cone pulleys that are the same size and shape allow for a change in speed to be transferred from one shaft to another just by shifting the belt back and forth. Even the smallest adjustments can be made this way.

Fig. 68. Universal Joint.—A wheel, with four projecting pins, is placed between the U-shaped yokes on the ends of the approaching shafts. The pins serve as the pivots for the angles formed by the two shafts.

Fig. 68. Universal Joint.—A wheel with four sticking out pins is positioned between the U-shaped yokes at the ends of the two connecting shafts. The pins act as pivots for the angles created by the two shafts.

Fig. 69. Trammel for Making an Ellipse.—This is a tool easily made, which will be of great service in the shop. In a disc (A), preferably made of brass, are two channels (B) at right angles to each other. The grooves are undercut, so that the blocks (C) will fit and slide in the grooves and be held therein by the dove-tailed formation. Each block is longer than the width of the groove, and has an outwardly projecting pin which passes through a bar (D). One pin (E) is movable along in a slot, but is adjustable at any point so that the shape of the ellipse may bep. 71 varied. The end of the bar has a series of holes (G) for a pencil, so that the size of the ellipse may also be changed.

Fig. 69. Ellipse-Making Trammel.—This is a tool that’s easy to make and will be very useful in the workshop. In a disc (A), preferably made of brass, there are two grooves (B) that are perpendicular to each other. The grooves are undercut, allowing the blocks (C) to fit and slide within them while being held in place by the dove-tailed design. Each block is longer than the groove width and has a pin that sticks out, which goes through a bar (D). One pin (E) can move along a slot but can be adjusted at any position, letting you change the shape of the ellipsep. 71. The end of the bar features a series of holes (G) for a pencil, so you can also change the size of the ellipse.

Fig. 70. Escapements.—Various forms of escapements may be made, but the object of all is the same. The device is designed to permit a wheel to move intermittingly or in a step by step movement, by the swinging motion of a pendulum. Another thing is accomplished by it. The teeth of the escapement are cut at such an angle that, as one of the teeth of the escapement is released from one tooth of the escapement wheel, the spring, or the weight of the clock, will cause one of the teeth of the escapement wheel to engage the other tooth of the escapement, and give the pendulum an impulse in the other direction. In the figure, A is the escapement, B the escapement wheels and a, b, thep. 72 pallets, which are cut at suitable angles to actuate the pendulum.

Fig. 70. Escapements.—There are different types of escapements, but they all serve the same purpose. This device allows a wheel to move intermittently or step by step, thanks to the swinging motion of a pendulum. Additionally, the design helps by cutting the teeth of the escapement at a specific angle. When one tooth of the escapement is released from the escapement wheel, the clock's spring or weight causes another tooth of the escapement wheel to engage with the next tooth of the escapement, giving the pendulum a push in the opposite direction. In the figure, A represents the escapement, B represents the escapement wheels, and a and b are the p. 72 pallets, which are cut at appropriate angles to activate the pendulum.

Fig. 71. Simple Device to Prevent a Wheel or Shaft prom Turning Back.—This is a substitute for a pawl and ratchet wheel. A is a drum or a hollow wheel and B a pulley on a shaft, and this pulley turns loosely with the drum (A). Four tangential slots (C) are cut into the perimeter of the pulley (B), and in each is a hardened steel roller (D). It matters not in what position the wheel (B) may be, at least two of the rollers will always be in contact with the inside of the drum (A), and thus cause the pulley and drum to turn together. On reversing the direction of the pulley the rollers are immediately freed from binding contact.

Fig. 71. Simple Device to Stop a Wheel or Shaft from Rotating Backward.—This serves as an alternative to a pawl and ratchet wheel. A is a drum or a hollow wheel, and B is a pulley on a shaft; this pulley rotates loosely with the drum (A). Four tangential slots (C) are cut into the edge of the pulley (B), and each slot contains a hardened steel roller (D). No matter the position of the wheel (B), at least two of the rollers will always be in contact with the inside of the drum (A), ensuring that the pulley and drum turn together. When the direction of the pulley is reversed, the rollers are immediately released from contact.

Fig. 72. Racks and Pinions.—The object of this form of mechanism is to provide a reciprocating, or back-and-forth motion, from a shaft which turns continually in one direction. A is the rack and B a mutilated gear. When the gear turns it moves the rack in one direction, because the teeth of the gear engage the lower rack teeth, and when the rack has moved to the end its teeth engage the teeth of the upper rack, thus reversing the movement of the rack.

Fig. 72. Racks and Pinions.—The purpose of this mechanism is to create a back-and-forth motion from a continuously turning shaft. A is the rack and B is a modified gear. When the gear turns, it moves the rack in one direction because the gear's teeth connect with the lower teeth of the rack. Once the rack has moved to the end, its teeth engage the teeth of the upper rack, reversing the movement of the rack.

Fig. 73. Mutilated Gears.—These are made in so many forms, and adapted for such ap. 73 variety of purposes, that we merely give a few samples to show what is meant by the term.

Fig. 73. Damaged Gears.—These come in many forms and are adapted for such ap. 73 wide range of purposes that we will just provide a few examples to illustrate what is meant by the term.

Fig. 74. Simple Shaft Coupling.—Prepare two similarly formed discs (A, B), which are provided with hubs so they may be keyed to the ends of the respective shafts. One disc has four or more projecting pins (C), and the other disc suitable holes (D) to receive the pins.

Fig. 74. Shaft Coupling.—Get two similarly shaped discs (A, B) that have hubs so they can be attached to the ends of the respective shafts. One disc should have four or more projecting pins (C), and the other disc should have holes (D) that fit the pins.

Fig. 75. Clutches.—This is a piece of mechanism which is required in so many kinds of machinery, that we show several of the most approved types.

Fig. 75. Clutches.—This is a part of machinery that's essential in many types of equipment, so we present several of the most popular designs.

Fig. 76. Ball and Socket Joints.—The most practical form of ball and socket joints is simply a head in which is a bowl-shaped cavity the depth of one-half of the ball. A plate with a central opening small enough to hold in the ball, andp. 74 still large enough at the neck to permit the arm carrying the ball to swing a limited distance, is secured by threads, or by bolts, to the head. The first figure shows this.

Fig. 76. Ball-and-Socket Joints.—The most practical type of ball and socket joint consists of a head that has a bowl-shaped cavity, which is half the depth of the ball. A plate with a central hole, small enough to hold the ball but large enough at the neck to allow the arm carrying the ball to swing a limited distance, is secured with threads or bolts to the head. The first figure illustrates this.

Fig. 77 illustrates a simple manner of tightening the ball so as to hold the standard in any desired position.

Fig. 77 shows an easy way to tighten the ball to keep the standard in any position you want.

Fig. 78. Tripping Devices.—These are usually in the form of hooks, so arranged that a slight pull on the tripping lever will cause the suspended articles to drop.

Fig. 78. Tripping Devices.—These typically look like hooks, designed so that a gentle tug on the tripping lever will make the hanging items fall.

Fig. 79. Anchor Bolt.—These are used in brick or cement walls. The bolt itself screws into a sleeve which is split, and draws a wedge nut up to the split end of the sleeve. As a result the split sleeve opens or spreads out and binds against the wall sufficiently to prevent the bolt from being withdrawn.

Fig. 79. Anchor Bolt.—These are used in brick or cement walls. The bolt screws into a sleeve that is split, pulling a wedge nut up to the split end of the sleeve. This causes the split sleeve to open up and press against the wall tightly enough to stop the bolt from coming out.

Fig. 80. Lazy Tongs.—One of the simplest and most effective instruments for carrying ice, boxes or heavy objects, which are bulky or inconvenient to carry. It grasps the article firmly, and the heavier the weight the tighter is its grasp.

Fig. 80. Lazy Tongs.—One of the easiest and most efficient tools for moving ice, boxes, or other heavy and awkward items. It securely holds the item, and the more weight it carries, the tighter its grip becomes.

Fig. 81. Disc Shears.—This is a useful tool either for cutting tin or paper, pasteboard and the like. It will cut by the act of drawing the material through it, but if power is applied to one or to both of the shafts the work is much facilitated,p. 75 particularly in thick or hard material.

Fig. 81. Disc Shears.—This is a handy tool for cutting tin, paper, pasteboard, and similar materials. It cuts by pulling the material through it, but applying force to one or both shafts makes the job much easier,p. 75 especially with thick or tough materials.

Fig. 82. Wabble Saw.—This is a most simple and useful tool, as it will readily and quickly saw out a groove so that it is undercut. The saw is put on the mandrel at an angle, as will be seen, and should be run at a high rate of speed.

Fig. 82. Wobble Saw.—This is a very simple and handy tool because it efficiently and quickly cuts out a groove that is undercut. The saw is positioned on the mandrel at an angle, as shown, and should operate at a high speed.

Fig. 83. Crank Motion by a Slotted Yoke.—This produces a straight back-and-forth movement from the circular motion of a wheel or crank. It entirely dispenses with a pitman rod, and it enables the machine, or the part of the machine operated, to be placed close to the crank.

Fig. 83. Crank Movement with a Slotted Yoke.—This creates a linear back-and-forth movement from the circular motion of a wheel or crank. It completely eliminates the need for a pitman rod, allowing the machine, or the part of the machine being driven, to be positioned close to the crank.

Fig. 84. Continuous Feed by the Motion of a Lever.—The simple lever with a pawl on each side of the fulcrum is the most effective means to make a continuous feed by the simple movement of a lever. The form shown is capable ofp. 76 many modifications, and it can be easily adapted for any particular work desired.

Fig. 84. Continuous Feed through the Movement of a Lever.—The basic lever with a pawl on either side of the fulcrum is the most effective way to achieve continuous feeding through the simple motion of a lever. The design shown can bep. 76 modified in many ways and can be easily tailored to fit any specific task needed.

Fig. 85. Crank Motion.—By the structure shown, namely, a slotted lever (A), a quick return can be made with the lever. B indicates the fulcrum.

Fig. 85. Crank Movement.—Using the setup shown, which includes a slotted lever (A), a quick return can be achieved with the lever. B represents the fulcrum.

Fig. 86. Ratchet Head.—This shows a well-known form for common ratchet. It has the advantage that the radially movable plugs (A) are tangentially disposed, and rest against walls (B) eccentrically disposed, and are, therefore, in such a position that they easily slide over the inclines.

Fig. 86. Ratchet Wrench.—This illustrates a familiar design for a standard ratchet. It has the benefit that the radially movable plugs (A) are arranged tangentially and rest against walls (B) that are positioned eccentrically, allowing them to easily slide over the inclines.

Fig. 87. Bench Clamp.—A pair of dogs (A, B), with the ends bent toward each other, and pivoted midway between the ends to the bench in such a position that the board (C), to be held between them, on striking the rear ends of the dogs, will force the forward ends together, and thus clampp. 77 it firmly for planing or other purposes.

Fig. 87. Bench Vise.—A pair of clamps (A, B) that have their ends bent towards each other and are pivoted midway between the ends to the bench. When a board (C) is placed between them and pushed against the back ends of the clamps, it forces the front ends together, securely holding it in place for planing or other uses.p. 77

Fig. 88. Helico-Volute Spring.—This is a form of spring for tension purposes. The enlarged cross-section of the coil in its middle portion, with the ends tapering down to the eyes, provides a means whereby the pull is transferred from the smaller to the larger portions, without producing a great breaking strain near the ends.

Fig. 88. Helico-Volute Spring.—This is a type of spring used for tension. The wider cross-section of the coil in the middle, along with the ends tapering down to the eyes, allows the pull to be distributed from the smaller to the larger sections without causing a significant breaking strain near the ends.

Fig. 89. Double Helico-Volute.—This form, so far as the outlines are considered, is the opposite of Fig. 88. A compression spring of this kind has a very wide range of movement.

Fig. 89. Double Helico-Volute.—This shape, in terms of its outlines, is the opposite of Fig. 88. A compression spring of this type has a very wide range of movement.

Fig. 90. Helical Spring.—This form of coil, uniform from end to end, is usually made of metal which is square in cross-section, and used where it is required for heavy purposes

Fig. 90. Coil Spring.—This type of coil, consistent from one end to the other, is typically made of metal that has a square cross-section and is used for heavy-duty applications.

p. 78

Fig. 91. Single Volute Helix-Spring.—This is also used for compression, intended where tremendous weights or resistances are to be overcome, and when the range of movement is small.

Fig. 91. Single Volute Helix Spring.—This is also used for compression, designed for situations where heavy weights or strong resistances need to be overcome, and when the movement range is limited.

Fig. 92. Flat Spiral, or Convolute.—This is for small machines. It is the familiar form used in watches owing to its delicate structure, and it is admirably adapted to yield to the rocking motion of an arbor.

Fig. 92. Flat Spiral or Convolute.—This is for small machines. It’s the common design used in watches because of its delicate structure, and it works perfectly to accommodate the rocking motion of an arbor.

Fig. 93. Eccentric Rod and Strap.—A simple and convenient form of structure, intended to furnish a reciprocating motion where a crank is not available. An illustration of its use is shown on certain types of steam engine to operate the valves.

Fig. 93. Quirky Rod and Strap.—A straightforward and handy structure designed to provide a back-and-forth motion when a crank isn't an option. Its application can be seen in various types of steam engines to operate the valves.

Fig. 94. Anti-Dead Center for Foot-Lathes.—A flat, spiral spring (A), with its coiled end attached to firm support (B), has its other end pivotally attached to the crank-pin (C), the tension of the spring being such that when the lathe stops the crack-pin will always be at one side of the dead-center, thus enabling the operator to start the machine by merely pressing the foot downwardly on the treadle (D)

Fig. 94. Anti-Dead Center for Foot Lathes.—A flat, spiral spring (A), with one end secured to a solid support (B), is connected at the other end to the crank-pin (C). The tension of the spring ensures that when the lathe stops, the crank-pin is always positioned slightly off the dead-center. This allows the operator to start the machine simply by pressing down on the treadle (D).


CHAPTER VIIToC

PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS

A workman is able to select the right metals because he knows that each has some peculiar property which is best adapted for his particular use. These with their meaning will now be explained.

A worker can choose the right metals because he understands that each metal has unique properties that are best suited for his specific needs. These, along with their meanings, will now be explained.

Elasticity.—This exists in metals in three distinct ways: First, in the form of traction. Hang a weight on a wire and it will stretch a certain amount. When the weight is removed the wire shrinks back to its original length.

Flexibility.—This occurs in metals in three different ways: First, in the form of tension. If you hang a weight on a wire, it will stretch a certain distance. When you take the weight off, the wire goes back to its original length.

Second: If the weight on the wire is rotated, so as to twist it, and the hand is taken from the weight, it will untwist itself, and go back to its original position. This is called torsion.

Second: If the weight on the wire is twisted and then the hand is removed from the weight, it will untwist itself and return to its original position. This is called torsion.

Third: A piece of metal may be coiled up like a watch spring, or bent like a carriage spring, and it will yield when pressure is applied. This is called flexure.

Third: A piece of metal can be coiled like a watch spring or bent like a carriage spring, and it will give when pressure is applied. This is called flexure.

Certain kinds of steel have these qualities in a high degree.

Certain types of steel have these qualities to a high degree.

Tenacity.—This is a term used to express the resistance which the body opposes to the separation of its parts. It is determined by formingp. 80 the metal into a wire, and hanging on weights, to find how much will be required to break it. If we have two wires, the first with a transverse area only one-quarter that of the second, and the first breaks at 25 pounds, while the second breaks at 50 pounds, the tenacity of the first is twice as great as that of the second.

Persistence.—This term refers to the resistance that a body has against the separation of its parts. It is measured by shapingp. 80 the metal into a wire and applying weights to determine how much force is needed to break it. If we have two wires, with the first having a cross-sectional area that is only one-quarter of the second, and the first breaks at 25 pounds while the second breaks at 50 pounds, then the tenacity of the first wire is twice that of the second.

To the boy who understands simple ratio in mathematics, the problem would be like this:

To the boy who grasps basic ratios in math, the problem would look like this:

25 × 4 : 50 × 1, or as 2 : 1.

25 × 4 : 50 × 1, or as 2 : 1.

The Most Tenacious Metal.—Steel has the greatest tenacity of all metals, and lead the least. In proportion to weight, however, there are many substances which have this property in a higher degree. Cotton fibers will support millions of times their own weight.

The Toughest Metal.—Steel has the highest toughness of all metals, while lead has the lowest. However, in relation to their weight, there are many materials that exhibit this property to a greater extent. Cotton fibers can hold millions of times their own weight.

There is one peculiar thing, that tenacity varies with the form of the body. A solid cylindrical body has a greater strength than a square one of the same size; and a hollow cylinder more tenacity than a solid one. This principle is well known in the bones of animals, in the feathers of birds, and in the stems of many plants.

There’s an interesting point that durability changes with the shape of the body. A solid cylinder is stronger than a square one of the same size, and a hollow cylinder is more durable than a solid one. This principle is well understood in the bones of animals, in the feathers of birds, and in the stems of many plants.

In almost every metal tenacity diminishes as the temperature increases.

In almost every metal, strength decreases as the temperature rises.

Ductility.—This is a property whereby a metal may be drawn out to form a wire. Some metals,p. 81 like cast iron, have absolutely no ductility. The metal which possesses this property to the highest degree, is platinum. Wires of this metal have been drawn out so fine that over 30,000 of them laid side by side would measure only one inch across, and a mile of such wire would weigh only a grain, or one seven-thousandth of a pound.

Flexibility.—This is a property that allows a metal to be stretched into a wire. Some metals, p. 81 like cast iron, have no ductility at all. The metal with the highest degree of ductility is platinum. Wires made from this metal can be drawn so fine that over 30,000 of them laid side by side would only measure one inch across, and a mile of this wire would weigh just a grain, or one seven-thousandth of a pound.

Malleability.—This is considered a modification of ductility. Any metal which can be beaten out, as with a hammer, or flattened into sheets with rollers, is considered malleable. Gold possesses this property to the highest degree. It has been beaten into leaves one three-hundred-thousandth of an inch thick.

Malleability.—This is seen as a form of ductility. Any metal that can be hammered out or rolled into sheets is considered malleable. Gold has this property to the highest extent. It has been flattened into sheets that are one three-hundred-thousandth of an inch thick.

Hardness.—This is the resistance which bodies offer to being scratched by others. As an example, the diamond has the capacity to scratch all, but cannot be scratched by any other.

Toughness.—This is the resistance that objects have against being scratched by others. For example, a diamond can scratch everything but cannot be scratched by anything else.

Alloys.—Alloys, that is a combination of two or more metals, are harder than the pure metals, and for this reason jewelry, and coins, are usually alloyed.

Alloys.—Alloys, which are a mix of two or more metals, are tougher than pure metals. Because of this, jewelry and coins are typically made from alloys.

The resistance of a body to compression does not depend upon its hardness. Strike a diamond with a hammer and it flies to pieces, but wood does not. One is brittle and the other is tough.

The resistance of an object to compression isn't determined by how hard it is. If you hit a diamond with a hammer, it shatters, but wood does not. One is brittle, while the other is tough.

The machinist can utilize this property by understanding that velocity enables a soft materialp. 82 to cut a harder one. Thus, a wrought iron disc rotating rapidly, will cut such hard substances as agate or quartz.

The machinist can take advantage of this property by realizing that speed allows a softer materialp. 82 to cut through a harder one. Therefore, a rapidly spinning wrought iron disc can cut through tough materials like agate or quartz.

Resistance.—All metals offer more or less resistance to the flow of an electric current. Silver offers the least resistance, and German silver the greatest. Temperature also affects the flow. It passes more easily over a cold than a warm conductor.

Resistance.—All metals provide varying levels of resistance to electric current. Silver has the least resistance, while German silver has the most. Temperature also influences the flow; it travels more easily through a cold conductor than a warm one.

Persistence.—All metals on receiving heat, will retain it for a certain length of time, and will finally cool down to the temperature of the surrounding atmosphere. Some, like aluminum, retain it for a long time; others, as iron, will give it off quickly.

Determination.—All metals, when heated, will keep that heat for a certain period and will eventually cool down to match the temperature of the surrounding air. Some metals, like aluminum, hold onto the heat for a long time; others, like iron, release it quickly.

Conductivity.—All metals will conduct heat and cold, as well as electricity. If one end of a metal bar is heated, the heat creeps along to the other end until it has the same temperature throughout. This is called equalization.

Conductivity.—All metals can conduct heat and cold, as well as electricity. When one end of a metal bar is heated, the heat spreads to the other end until the entire bar reaches the same temperature. This process is known as equalization.

If a heated bar is placed in contact with another, the effect is to increase the temperature of the cold bar and lower that of the warm bar. This is called reciprocity.

If a heated bar is placed in contact with another, the result is that the temperature of the cold bar increases while the temperature of the warm bar decreases. This is called reciprocity.

Molecular Forces.Molecular attraction is a force which acts in such a way as to bring all the particles of a body together. It acts in threep. 83 ways, dependent on the particular conditions which exist.

Molecular Forces.Molecular attraction is a force that pulls all the particles of a body together. It operates in threep. 83 ways, depending on the specific conditions present.

First: Cohesion. This exists between molecules which are of the same kind, as for instance, iron. Cohesion of the particles is very strong in solids, much weaker in liquids, and scarcely exists at all between the particles in gases.

First: Cohesion. This occurs between molecules that are the same type, like iron. The cohesion of the particles is very strong in solids, much weaker in liquids, and almost nonexistent between the particles in gases.

Second: Adhesion is that property which exists between the surfaces of bodies in contact. If two flat surfaces are pressed together, as for instance, two perfectly smooth and flat pieces of lead, they will adhere. If, for instance, oil should be put on the surfaces, before putting them together, they would adhere so firmly that it would be difficult to pull them apart.

Second: Adhesion is the property that exists between the surfaces of objects in contact. If two flat surfaces are pressed together, like two perfectly smooth and flat pieces of lead, they will stick to each other. For example, if oil is applied to the surfaces before putting them together, they would stick so tightly that it would be hard to pull them apart.

Third: Affinity. This is another peculiarity about materials. Thus, while cohesion binds together the molecules of water, it is chemical affinity which unites two elements, like hydrogen and oxygen, of which water is composed.

Third: Affinity. This is another characteristic of materials. So, while cohesion keeps the molecules of water together, it's chemical affinity that combines two elements, like hydrogen and oxygen, which make up water.

Porosity.—All matter has little hollows or spaces between the molecules. You know what this is in the case of a sponge, or pumice stone. Certain metals have the pores so small that it is difficult to see them except with a very powerful glass. Under great pressure water can be forced through the pores of metals, as has been done inp. 84 the case of gold. Water also is porous, but the spaces between the molecules are very small.

Porosity.—All matter has tiny gaps or spaces between the molecules. You can see this in a sponge or pumice stone. Some metals have pores that are so small they can only be seen with a powerful microscope. Under high pressure, water can be pushed through the pores of metals, as was done in p. 84 the case of gold. Water is also porous, but the spaces between its molecules are very small.

Compressibility.—It follows from the foregoing statement, that if there are little interstices between the molecules, the various bodies can be compressed together. This can be done in varying degrees with all solids, but liquids, generally, have little compressibility. Gases are readily reduced in volume by compression.

Compressibility.—From the earlier point, it’s clear that if there are small spaces between molecules, different substances can be compressed together. This can happen to varying extents with all solids, but liquids typically have low compressibility. Gases, on the other hand, can easily be reduced in volume through compression.

Elasticity.—This is a property by virtue of which a body resumes its original form when compressed. India rubber, ivory and glass are examples of elasticity; whereas, lead and clay do not possess this property. Air is the most elastic of all substances.

Flexibility.—This is a property that allows a body to return to its original shape after being compressed. Examples of elastic materials include rubber, ivory, and glass, while lead and clay lack this property. Air is the most elastic substance of all.

Inertia.—This is a property of matter by virtue of which it cannot of itself change its state of motion or of rest.

Inactivity.—This is a property of matter that means it cannot change its state of motion or rest on its own.

Newton's first law of motion is, in substance, that matter at rest will eternally remain at rest, and matter in motion will forever continue in motion, unless acted on by some external force.

Newton's first law of motion states that an object at rest will stay at rest, and an object in motion will keep moving at the same speed and in the same direction, unless an external force acts on it.

A rider is carried over the head of a horse when the latter suddenly stops. This illustrates the inertia of movement. A stone at rest will always remain in that condition unless moved by some force. That shows the inertia of rest.

A rider gets thrown over the head of a horse when it suddenly stops. This illustrates the idea of inertia in motion. A stone that’s sitting still will stay that way unless something pushes it. That demonstrates the inertia of rest.

Momentum.—This is the term to designate thep. 85 quantity of motion in a body. This quantity varies and is dependent on the mass, together with the velocity. A fly wheel is a good example. It continues to move after the impelling force ceases; and a metal wheel has greater momentum than a wooden wheel at the same speed, owing to its greater mass.

Momentum.—This is the term used to describe thep. 85 amount of motion in an object. This amount changes and depends on both the mass and the speed. A flywheel serves as a good example. It keeps moving after the force that started it stops; and a metal wheel has more momentum than a wooden wheel at the same speed because it has more mass.

If, however, the wooden wheel is speeded up sufficiently it may have the same momentum as the metal one.

If the wooden wheel is spun fast enough, it can have the same momentum as the metal one.

Weight.—All substances have what is called weight. This means that everything is attracted toward the earth by the force of gravity. Gravity, however, is different from weight. All substances attract each other; not only in the direction of the center of the earth, but laterally, as well.

Weight.—All substances have what is called weight. This means that everything is pulled toward the earth by the force of gravity. However, gravity is different from weight. All substances attract each other; not only toward the center of the earth but also sideways.

Weight, therefore, has reference to the pull of an object toward the earth; and gravity to that influence which all matter has for each other independently of the direction.

Weight, then, refers to the force pulling an object toward the earth, while gravity is the influence that all matter has on each other, regardless of the direction.

Centripetal Force.—This attraction of the earth, which gives articles the property of weight, is termed centripetal force—that is, the drawing in of a body.

Centripetal Force.—The earth's attraction, which gives objects their weight, is called centripetal force—meaning the pulling in of a body.

Centrifugal Force.—The direct opposite of centripetal, is centrifugal force, which tends top. 86 throw outwardly. Dirt flying from a rapidly moving wheel illustrates this.

Centrifugal Force.—The opposite of centripetal force is centrifugal force, which tends top. 86 push outward. Dirt flying off a fast-moving wheel is a good example of this.

Capillary Attraction.—There is a peculiar property in liquids, which deserves attention, and should be understood, and that is the name given to the tendency of liquids to rise in fine tubes.

Capillary Action.—There’s a unique property in liquids that deserves attention and understanding, known as the tendency of liquids to rise in narrow tubes.

It is stated that water will always find its level. While this is true, we have an instance where, owing to the presence of a solid, made in a peculiar form, causes the liquid, within, to rise up far beyond the level of the water.

It’s said that water will always find its level. While that’s true, we have a situation where, because of a solid object shaped in a unique way, the liquid inside rises well above the water level.

This may be illustrated by three tubes of different internal diameters. The liquid rises up higher in the second than in the first, and still higher in the third than in the second. The smaller the tube the greater the height of the liquid.

This can be shown using three tubes with different internal diameters. The liquid rises higher in the second tube than in the first, and even higher in the third tube than in the second. The smaller the tube, the higher the liquid rises.

This is called capillary attraction, the word capillary meaning a hair. The phenomena is best observed when seen in tubes which are as fine as hairs. The liquid has an affinity for the metal, and creeps up the inside, and the distance it will thus move depends on the size of the tube.

This is called capillary attraction, with "capillary" meaning a hair. The phenomenon is best observed in tubes that are as thin as hairs. The liquid has an affinity for the metal and rises up inside, and the distance it moves depends on the size of the tube.

The Sap of Trees.—The sap of trees goes upwardly, not because the tree is alive, but due to this property in the contact of liquids with a solid. It is exactly on the same principle that if the end of a piece of blotting paper is immersedp. 87 in water, the latter will creep up and spread over the entire surface of the sheet.

Tree Sap.—Tree sap moves upward, not because the tree is alive, but because of how liquids interact with solids. It works on the same principle as when you dip a piece of blotting paper into water; the water will soak up and spread across the entire surface of the paper.

In like manner, oil moves upwardly in a wick, and will keep on doing so, until the lighted wick is extinguished, when the flow ceases. When it is again lighted the oil again flows, as before.

In the same way, oil travels up a wick and continues to do so until the burning wick is put out, at which point the flow stops. When it is lit again, the oil flows once more, just like before.

If it were not for this principle of capillary attraction, it would be difficult to form a bubble of air in a spirit level. You can readily see how the liquid at each end of the air bubble rounds it off, as though it tried to surround it.

If it weren't for this principle of capillary attraction, it would be hard to create a bubble of air in a spirit level. You can easily see how the liquid at each end of the air bubble rounds it out, as if it's trying to encircle it.

Sound.—Sound is caused by vibration, and it would be impossible to convey it without an elastic medium of some kind.

Audio.—Sound is created by vibrations, and it wouldn’t be possible to transmit it without some sort of elastic medium.

Acoustics is a branch of physics which treats of sounds. It is distinguished from music which has reference to the particular kinds.

Acoustics is a field of physics that deals with sound. It is different from music, which relates to specific types of sound.

Sounds are distinguished from noises. The latter are discordant and abrupt vibrations, whereas the former are regular and continuous.

Sounds are different from noises. The latter are harsh and sudden vibrations, while the former are steady and ongoing.

Sound Mediums.—- Gases, vapors, liquids and solids transmit vibrations, but liquids and solids propagate with greater velocity than gases.

Audio Platforms.—- Gases, vapors, liquids, and solids carry vibrations, but liquids and solids transmit them faster than gases.

Vibration.—A vibration is the moving to and fro of the molecules in a body, and the greater their movement the more intense is the sound. The intensity of the sound is affected by the density of the atmosphere, and the movementp. 88 of the winds also changes its power of transmission.

Vibe.—A vibration is the back-and-forth movement of the molecules in a substance, and the more they move, the louder the sound is. The loudness of the sound is influenced by the density of the air, and the movementp. 88 of the winds also affects how well it travels.

Sound is also made more intense if a sonorous body is near its source. This is taken advantage of in musical instruments, where a sounding-board is used, as in the case of the piano, and in the violin, which has a thin shell as a body for holding the strings.

Sound becomes more intense when a resonant body is close to its source. This principle is utilized in musical instruments, such as in the piano where a sounding board is used, and in the violin, which has a thin shell that acts as the body for holding the strings.

Another curious thing is shown in the speaking tube, where the sound waves are confined, so that they are carried along in one line, and as they are not interfered with will transmit the vibrations to great distances.

Another interesting thing is demonstrated in the speaking tube, where sound waves are contained, allowing them to travel in a straight line, and since they aren't disturbed, they can transmit vibrations over long distances.

Velocity of Sound.—The temperature of the air has also an effect on the rate of transmission, but for general purposes a temperature of 62 degrees has been taken as the standard. The movement is shown to be about 50 miles in 4 minutes, or at the rate of 1,120 feet per second.

Speed of Sound.—The air temperature also affects how quickly sound travels, but for most cases, a temperature of 62 degrees is used as the standard. The speed is about 50 miles in 4 minutes, or approximately 1,120 feet per second.

In water, however, the speed is four times greater; and in iron nearly fifteen times greater. Soft earth is a poor conductor, while rock and solid earth convey very readily. Placing the ear on a railway track will give the vibrations of a moving train miles before it can be heard through the air.

In water, though, the speed is four times faster; and in iron, it's almost fifteen times faster. Soft earth is a bad conductor, while rock and solid ground transmit sound really well. Putting your ear on a railway track will let you feel the vibrations of a moving train miles away before you can hear it through the air.

Sound Reflections.—Sound waves move outwardly from the object in the form of wave-likep. 89 rings, but those concentric rings, as they are called, may be interrupted at various points by obstacles. When that is the case the sound is buffeted back, producing what is called echoes.

Sound Reflections.—Sound waves travel outward from the object in wave-likep. 89 rings, but these concentric rings can be disrupted at different points by obstacles. When this happens, the sound gets bounced back, creating what we call echoes.

Resonance.—Materials have a quality that produces a very useful result, called resonance, and it is one of the things that gives added effect to a speaker's voice in a hall, where there is a constant succession of echoes. A wall distant from the speaker about 55 feet, produces an almost instantaneous reflection of the sound, and at double that measurement the effect is still stronger. When the distance is too short for the reflecting sound to be heard, we have resonance. It enriches the sound of the voice, and gives a finer quality to musical instruments.

Resonance.—Materials have a quality that creates a very useful effect known as resonance, which enhances a speaker's voice in a hall where echoes are constantly bouncing around. A wall about 55 feet away from the speaker reflects the sound almost immediately, and at double that distance, the effect is even stronger. When the distance is too short for the reflected sound to be heard, we experience resonance. It enriches the sound of the voice and adds a better quality to musical instruments.

Echoes.—When sounds are heard after the originals are emitted they tend to confusion, and the quality of resonance is lost. There are places where echoes are repeated many times. In the chateau of Simonetta, Italy, a sound will be repeated thirty times.

Echoes.—When sounds are heard after the originals are made, they often create confusion, and the quality of the resonance is diminished. There are locations where echoes are repeated multiple times. In the chateau of Simonetta, Italy, a sound can be repeated thirty times.

Speaking Trumpet.—This instrument is an example of the use of reflection. It is merely a bell-shaped, or flaring body, the large end of which is directed to the audience. The voice talking into the small end is directed forwardly, and is reflected from the sides, and its resonance also enables thep. 90 vibrations to carry farther than without the use of the solid part of the instrument.

Public Announcement System.—This instrument shows how reflection works. It's simply a bell-shaped or flaring body, with the larger end facing the audience. When someone speaks into the small end, the sound is directed forward and reflects off the sides, allowing thep. 90 vibrations to travel further than they would without the solid part of the instrument.

The ear trumpet is an illustration of a sound-collecting device, the waves being brought together by reflection.

The ear trumpet is an example of a device that collects sound, with the waves being gathered through reflection.

The Stethoscope.—This is an instrument used by physicians, and it is so delicate that the movements of the organs of the body can be heard with great distinctness. It merely collects the vibrations, and transmits them to the ears by the small tubes which are connected with the collecting bell.

The Stethoscope.—This is a tool used by doctors, and it’s so sensitive that you can hear the movements of the body’s organs very clearly. It simply gathers the vibrations and sends them to the ears through the small tubes attached to the collection bell.

The Vitascope.—- Numerous instruments have been devised to determine the rate of vibration of different materials and structures, the most important being the vitascope, which has a revolvable cylinder, blackened with soot, and this being rotated at a certain speed, the stylus, which is attached to the vibrating body, in contact with the cylinder, will show the number per second, as well as the particular character of each oscillation.

The Vitascope.—- Many devices have been created to measure the vibration rate of various materials and structures, the most significant being the vitascope. It has a revolving cylinder coated in soot, and when this is spun at a specific speed, the stylus connected to the vibrating object touches the cylinder, indicating the number of vibrations per second and the unique features of each oscillation.

The Phonautograph.—This instrument is used to register the vibration of wind instruments, as well as the human voice, and the particular forms of the vibrations are traced on a cylinder, the tracing stylus being attached to a thin vibrating membrane which is affected by the voice or instrument.

The Phonautograph.—This device records the vibrations of wind instruments and the human voice, with the specific patterns of these vibrations being drawn onto a cylinder. The stylus that creates the tracing is connected to a thin vibrating membrane that responds to the voice or instrument.

The Phonograph.—This instrument is the outgrowth of the stylus forms of the apparatus dep. 91scribed, but in this case the stylus, or needle, is fixed to a metallic diaphragm, and its point makes an impression on suitable material placed on the outside of a revolvable cylinder or disc.

The Record Player.—This device is a development of the stylus-based apparatus dep. 91scribed, but here the stylus, or needle, is attached to a metal diaphragm, and its tip creates an imprint on a suitable material placed on the surface of a rotating cylinder or disc.

Light.-Light is the agent which excites the sensation of vision in the eye. Various theories have been advanced by scientists to account for the phenomenon, and the two most noted views are the corpuscular, promulgated by Sir Isaac Newton, and the undulatory, enunciated by Huygens and Euler.

Illuminate.-Light is the agent that triggers the sensation of sight in the eye. Scientists have proposed various theories to explain this phenomenon, with the two most notable being the corpuscular theory, advocated by Sir Isaac Newton, and the undulatory theory, presented by Huygens and Euler.

The corpuscular theory conceives that light is a substance of exceedingly light particles which are shot forth with immense velocity. The undulatory theory, now generally accepted, maintains that light is carried by vibrations in ether. Ether is a subtle elastic medium which fills all space.

The corpuscular theory suggests that light is made up of extremely small particles that move at incredible speeds. The undulatory theory, which is now widely accepted, argues that light travels through vibrations in a medium called ether. Ether is a fine, elastic substance that fills all of space.

Luminous bodies are those like the sun, which emit light. Rays may diverge, that is, spread out; converge, or point toward each other; or they may be parallel with each other.

Luminous bodies are those like the sun that give off light. Rays can diverge, meaning they spread out; converge, or come together; or they can be parallel to each other.

Velocity of Light.—Light moves at the rate of about 186,000 miles a second. As the sun is about 94,000,000 miles from the earth, it takes 8 1/2 minutes for the light of the sun to reach us.

Speed of Light.—Light travels at a speed of roughly 186,000 miles per second. Since the sun is about 94,000,000 miles away from Earth, it takes about 8 Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. 1/2 minutes for sunlight to reach us.

Reflection.—One of the most important things connected with light is that of reflection. It is that quality which is utilized in telescopes, microp. 92scopes, mirrors, heliograph signaling and other like apparatus and uses. The underlying principle is, that a ray is reflected, or thrown back from a mirror at the same angle as that which produces the light.

Reflection.—One of the most important aspects of light is reflection. This quality is used in telescopes, microscopes, mirrors, heliograph signaling, and other similar devices. The basic principle is that a ray of light is reflected, or bounced back, from a mirror at the same angle at which it hits the surface.

When the rays of the sun, which are, of course, parallel, strike a concave mirror, the reflecting rays are converged; and when the rays strike a convex mirror they diverge. In this way the principle is employed in reflecting telescopes.

When sunlight, which is always parallel, hits a concave mirror, the reflecting rays come together; and when the rays hit a convex mirror, they spread out. This principle is used in reflecting telescopes.

Refraction.—This is the peculiar action of light in passing through substances. If a ray passes through water at an angle to the surface the ray will bend downwardly in passing through, and then again pass on in a straight line. This will be noticed if a pencil is stood in a glass of water at an angle, when it will appear bent.

Bending light.—This is the unique behavior of light as it moves through different materials. When a ray of light enters water at an angle, it will bend downward while it passes through, and then continue on in a straight line. You can see this effect if you place a pencil in a glass of water at an angle; it will look bent.

Refraction is that which enables light to be divided up, or analyzed. In this way white light from the sun is shown to be composed of seven principal colors.

Refraction is what allows light to be separated or analyzed. In this way, white light from the sun is revealed to be made up of seven main colors.

Colors.—If the light is passed through a prism, which is a triangularly shaped piece of glass, the rays on emerging will diverge from each other, and when they fall on a wall or screen the colors red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet are shown

Colors.—If light passes through a prism, which is a triangular piece of glass, the rays will spread apart as they come out, and when they hit a wall or screen, you'll see the colors red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet.

p. 93

The reason for this is that the ray in passing through the prism has the different colors in it refract at different angles, the violet bending more than the red.

The reason for this is that as the ray passes through the prism, the different colors in it refract at different angles, with violet bending more than red.

The Spectroscope.—The ability to make what is thus called a spectrum, brought forth one of the most wonderful instruments ever devised by man. If any metal, or material, is fused, or put in such a condition that a ray of light can be obtained from it, and this light is passed through a prism, it will be found that each substance has its own peculiar divisions and arrangements of colors.

The Spectroscope.—The ability to create what is known as a spectrum led to the invention of one of the most amazing instruments ever created by humans. If any metal or material is heated or placed in a condition where a ray of light can be emitted from it, and this light is passed through a prism, it will be observed that each substance has its own unique patterns and arrangements of colors.

In this way substances are determined by what is called spectrum analysis, and it is by means of this instrument that the composition of the sun, and the planets and fixed stars are determined.

In this way, substances are identified through something called spectrum analysis, and it is with this tool that we find out the makeup of the sun, planets, and fixed stars.

The Rainbow.—The rainbow is one of the effects of refraction, as the light, striking the little globular particles of water suspended in the air, produces a breaking up of the white light into its component colors, and the sky serves as a background for viewing the analysis thus made.

The Rainbow.—The rainbow is a result of refraction, occurring when light hits tiny spherical water droplets in the air, breaking down white light into its individual colors, with the sky providing a backdrop for this visual display.

Heat.—It is now conclusively proven, that heat, like light, magnetism and electricity, is merely a mode of motion.

Heat.—It has now been definitively established that heat, just like light, magnetism, and electricity, is simply a form of motion.

The mechanical theory of heat may be shown by rubbing together several bodies. Heat expandsp. 94 all substances, except ice, and in expanding develops an enormous force.

The mechanical theory of heat can be demonstrated by rubbing together several objects. Heat causesp. 94 all materials to expand, except for ice, and this expansion generates a tremendous amount of force.

Expansion.—In like manner liquids expand with heat. The power of mercury in expanding may be understood when it is stated that a pressure of 10,000 pounds would be required to prevent the expansion of mercury, when heated simply 10 degrees.

Growth.—Similarly, liquids expand with heat. The ability of mercury to expand can be illustrated by noting that a pressure of 10,000 pounds would be needed to stop mercury from expanding when it's heated by just 10 degrees.

Gases also expand. While water, and the different solids, all have their particular units of expansion, it is not so with gases, as all have the same coefficient

Gases also expand. While water and different solids all have their specific rates of expansion, this isn't the case with gases, as they all share the same coefficient.


CHAPTER VIIIToC

HOW DRAUGHTING BECOMES A VALUABLE AID

The ability to read drawings is a necessary part of the boy's education. To know how to use the tools, is still more important. In conveying an idea about a piece of mechanism, a sketch is given. Now, the sketch may be readable in itself, requiring no explanation, or it may be of such a nature that it will necessitate some written description.

The ability to read drawings is an essential part of a boy's education. Knowing how to use the tools is even more important. When conveying an idea about a piece of machinery, a sketch is provided. This sketch may be clear enough on its own, needing no explanation, or it might require some written description to clarify it.

Fig. 95. Plain Circle Fig. 95. Simple CircleToList

Lines in Drawing.—- In drawing, lines have a definite meaning. A plain circular line, like Fig. 95, when drawn in that way, conveys three meanings: It may represent a rim, or a bent piece of wire; it may illustrate a disk; or, it may convey the idea of a ball.

Lines in Drawing.—- In drawing, lines have a specific meaning. A simple circular line, like Fig. 95, when drawn this way, has three interpretations: It can represent a rim or a bent piece of wire; it can illustrate a disk; or it can convey the idea of a ball.

Suppose we develop them to express the three forms accurately. Fig. 96, by merely adding anp. 96 interior line, shows that it is a rim. There can be no further doubt about that expression.

Suppose we design them to accurately show the three forms. Fig. 96, by simply adding anp. 96 interior line, makes it clear that it is a rim. There can be no doubt about that expression.

Fig. 97 shows a single line, but it will now be noticed that the line is thickened at the lower right-hand side, and from this you can readily infer that it is a disk.

Fig. 97 shows a single line, but now you can see that the line is thicker on the lower right side, which allows you to easily conclude that it’s a disk.

Shading.—Fig. 98, by having a few shaded lines on the right and lower side, makes it have the appearance of a globe or a convex surface.

Shading.—Fig. 98, with a few shaded lines on the right and bottom sides, creates the illusion of a globe or a curved surface.

Figs. 96-98. Ring - Raised Surface - Sphere Figs. 96-98.
Ring - Elevated Surface - Sphere
ToList



Shading or thickening the lines also gives another expression to the same circular line.

Shading or thickening the lines also gives a different expression to the same circular line.

In Fig. 99, if the upper and left-hand side of the circle is heavily shaded, it shows that the area within the circle is depressed, instead of being raised.

In Fig. 99, if the top and left side of the circle is heavily shaded, it indicates that the area within the circle is lower, rather than elevated.

Direction of Shade.—On the other hand, if the shading lines, as in Fig. 100, are at the upper left-hand side, then the mind at once grasps the idea of a concave surface.

Direction of Shade.—On the other hand, if the shading lines, as in Fig. 100, are on the upper left side, then the mind immediately understands the concept of a concave surface.

The first thing, therefore, to keep in mind, is thisp. 97 fact: That in all mechanical drawing, the light is supposed to shine down from the upper left-hand corner and that, as a result, the lower vertical line, as well as the extreme right-hand vertical line, casts the shadows, and should, therefore, be made heavier than the upper horizontal, and the left-hand vertical lines.

The first thing to remember is thisp. 97 fact: In all mechanical drawing, light is assumed to come from the upper left corner. As a result, the lower vertical line and the far right vertical line cast shadows and should be thicker than the upper horizontal and the left vertical lines.

Fig. 99. Depressed Surface  Fig. 100. Concave Figs. 99-100.
Depressed Surface - Indented
ToList

There are exceptions to this rule, which will be readily understood by following out the illustrations in the order given below.

There are exceptions to this rule, which will be easily understood by following the examples provided in the order listed below.

Perspectives.—The utility of the heavy lines will be more apparent when drawing square, rectangular, or triangular objects.

Perspectives.—The usefulness of the thick lines will be more obvious when drawing square, rectangular, or triangular shapes.

Let us take Fig. 101, which appears to be the perspective of a cube. Notice that all lines are of the same thickness. When the sketch was first brought to me I thought it was a cube; but the explanation which followed, showed that the man whop. 98 made the sketch had an entirely different meaning.

Let’s look at Fig. 101, which seems to show the view of a cube. Notice that all the lines are equally thick. When I first saw the sketch, I thought it was a cube; but the following explanation revealed that the person whop. 98 created the sketch had a completely different intention.

He had intended to convey to my mind the idea of three pieces, A, B, C, of metal, of equal size, joined together so as to form a triangularly shaped pocket as shown in Fig. 101. The addition of the inner lines, like D, quickly dispelled the suggestion of the cube.

He meant to get across the concept of three pieces of metal, A, B, and C, all the same size, connected to create a triangular pocket as shown in Fig. 101. The introduction of the inner lines, like D, quickly removed the idea of a cube.

Figs. 101-104. Forms of Cubical Outlines Figs. 101-104. Shapes of Cubical OutlinesToList

"But," he remarked, "I want to use the thinnest metal, like sheets of tin; and you show them thick by adding the inner lines."

"But," he said, "I want to use the thinnest metal, like sheets of tin; and you make them look thick by adding the inner lines."

Such being the case, if we did not want to showp. 99 thickness as its structural form, we had to do it by making the lines themselves and the shading give that structural idea. This was done by using the single lines, as in Fig. 103, and by a slight shading of the pieces A, B, C.

Such being the case, if we didn’t want to showp. 99 thickness as its structural form, we had to convey that structural idea by using the lines themselves and the shading. This was achieved by using single lines, as in Fig. 103, and by lightly shading the pieces A, B, and C.

Fig. 105. Shading Edges Fig. 106. Shading Edges
Fig. 105. Fig. 106.
Shade Edges ToList

The Most Pronounced Lines.—If it had been a cube, or a solid block, the corners nearest the eye would have been most pronounced, as in Fig. 104, and the side next to the observer would have been darkest.

The Most Distinct Lines.—If it had been a cube or a solid block, the corners closest to the eye would have been the most prominent, as in Fig. 104, and the side facing the observer would have appeared the darkest.

This question of light and shadow is what expresses the surface formation of every drawing. Simple strokes form outlines of the object, but their thickness, and the shading, show the character enclosed by the lines.p. 100 Direction of Light.—Now, as stated, the casting of the shadow downward from the upper left-hand corner makes the last line over which it passes the thickest, and in Figs. 105 and 106 they are not the extreme lines at the bottom and at the right side, because of the close parallel lines.

This issue of light and shadow captures how every drawing is formed. Simple strokes create the outlines of an object, but their thickness and shading convey the character depicted within the lines.p. 100 Light Direction.—As mentioned, the shadow cast downwards from the upper left corner makes the last line it touches the thickest, and in Figs. 105 and 106, these lines are not the extreme ones at the bottom and right side due to the closely spaced parallel lines.

In Figs. 109 and 110 the blades superposed on the other are very thin, and the result is the lines at the right side and bottom are made much heavier.

In Figs. 109 and 110 the overlapping blades are very thin, and as a result, the lines on the right side and bottom appear much bolder.

Fig. 107. Illustrating Heavy Lines Fig. 108. Illustrating Heavy Lines
Fig. 107. Fig. 108.
Drawing Thick Lines ToList

This is more fully shown in Figs. 107 and 108. Notice the marked difference between the two figures, both of which show the same set of pulleys, and the last figure, by merely having the lower and the right-hand lines of each pulley heavy, changes the character of the representation, and tells much more clearly what the draughtsman sought to convey.

This is more fully shown in Figs. 107 and 108. Notice the clear difference between the two figures, both of which display the same set of pulleys. The last figure, by simply making the lower and right-hand lines of each pulley bolder, transforms the representation and communicates much more clearly what the draughtsman intended to convey.

Scale Drawings.—All drawings are made to ap. 101 scale where the article is large and cannot be indicated the exact size, using parts of an inch to represent inches; and parts of a foot to represent feet.

Scaled Drawings.—All drawings are created to ap. 101 scale for articles that are too large to show their exact dimensions, using fractions of an inch to represent inches and fractions of a foot to represent feet.

In order to reduce a drawing where a foot is the unit, it is always best to use one-and-a-half inches, or twelve-eighths of an inch, as the basis. In this way each eighth of an inch represents an inch. If the drawing should be made larger, then use three inches, and in that way each inch would be one-quarter of an inch.

To shrink a drawing where a foot is the unit, it's best to use one-and-a-half inches, or twelve-eighths of an inch, as the starting point. This way, each eighth of an inch stands for an inch. If you need to make the drawing bigger, then use three inches, making each inch a quarter of an inch.

Fig. 109. Illustrating Heavy Lines Fig. 110. Illustrating Heavy Lines
Fig. 109. Fig. 110.
Drawing Thick Lines ToList

The drawing should then have marked, in some conspicuous place, the scale, like the following: "Scale, 1 1/2" = 1'"; or, "Scale 3" = 1'."

The drawing should then clearly indicate the scale in a noticeable spot, like this: "Scale, 1 1/2" = 1'"; or, "Scale 3" = 1'."

Degree, and What it Means.—A degree is notp. 102 a measurement. The word is used to designate an interval, a position, or an angle. Every circle has 360 degrees, and when a certain degree is mentioned, it means a certain angle from what is called a base line.

Degree and Its Significance.—A degree is notp. 102 a measurement. The term is used to indicate an interval, a position, or an angle. Every circle has 360 degrees, and when a specific degree is referenced, it refers to a certain angle from what is called a base line.

Fig. 111. Illustrating Degrees Fig. 111. Showing Degrees ToList

Look at Fig. 111. This has a vertical line A, and a horizontal line B. The circle is thus divided into four parts, and where these lines A, B, cross the circle are the cardinal points. Each of the four parts is called a quadrant, and each quadrant has 90 degrees.

Look at Fig. 111. This has a vertical line A and a horizontal line B. The circle is divided into four sections, and where these lines A and B cross the circle are the cardinal points. Each of the four sections is called a quadrant, and each quadrant has 90 degrees.

Any line, like C, which is halfway between A and B, is 45 degrees. Halfway between A and C,p. 103 or between B and C, like the line D, is 22 1/2 degrees.

Any line, like C, that is in the middle of A and B, is at a 45-degree angle. The line halfway between A and C,p. 103 or between B and C, like line D, is at 22 1/2 degrees.

Memorizing Angles.—It is well to try and remember these lines by fixing the angles in the memory. A good plan is to divide any of the quadrants into thirds, as shown by the points E, F, and then remember that E is 30 degrees from the horizontal line B, and that F is 60 degrees. Or, you might say that F is 30 degrees from the vertical line A, and E 60 degrees from A. Either would be correct.

Remembering Angles.—It's helpful to try to remember these lines by committing the angles to memory. A good method is to divide any of the quadrants into thirds, like the points E, F, and then remember that E is 30 degrees from the horizontal line B, and that F is 60 degrees. Alternatively, you could say that F is 30 degrees from the vertical line A, and E is 60 degrees from A. Both are correct.

Fig. 112. Section Lining Fig. 112. Section Lining ToList

Section Lining.—In representing many parts of a machine, or article, it is necessary to show the parts cut off, which must be illustrated by what is called "section lining." Adjacent parts shouldp. 104 have the section lines running at right angles to each other, and always at 45 degrees.

Section Lining.—When illustrating various parts of a machine or object, it's important to show the cut-off sections, which is done using what’s known as "section lining." Adjacent parts shouldp. 104 have the section lines running at right angles to one another and always at 45 degrees.

Look at the outside and then the inside views of Fig. 112, and you will see how the contiguous parts have the angles at right angles, and clearly illustrate how every part of the wrench is made. Skill in depicting an article, for the purpose of constructing it from the drawing, will make the actual work on the bench and lathe an easy one.

Look at the outside and then the inside views of Fig. 112, and you'll see how the connected parts have right angles, clearly showing how each part of the wrench is made. Being skilled at illustrating something so it can be built from the drawing will make the actual work at the bench and lathe much easier.

Fig. 113. Drawing an Ellipse Fig. 113. Drawing an Ellipse ToList

Making Ellipses and Irregular Curves.—This is the hardest thing to do with drawing tools. A properly constructed elliptical figure is difficult,p. 105 principally, because two different sized curves are required, and the pen runs from one curve into the other. If the two curves meet at the wrong place, you may be sure you will have a distorted ellipse.

Creating Ellipses and Irregular Curves.—This is the most challenging task when using drawing tools. Creating a well-formed elliptical shape is tough,p. 105 mainly because it requires two curves of different sizes, and the pen has to transition smoothly from one curve to the other. If the two curves connect at the wrong point, you're likely to end up with a distorted ellipse.

Follow the directions given in connection with Fig. 113, and it will give you a good idea of merging the two lines.

Follow the instructions provided with Fig. 113, and it will give you a clear idea of how to combine the two lines.

First. Draw a horizontal line, A, which is in the direction of the major axis of the ellipse—that is, the longest distance across. The narrow part of the ellipse is called the minor axis.

First. Draw a horizontal line, A, that follows the direction of the major axis of the ellipse—that is, the longest distance across. The narrower part of the ellipse is called the minor axis.

Second. Draw a perpendicular line, B, which we will call the center of the ellipse, where it crosses the line A. This point must not be confounded with the focus. In a circle the focus is the exact center of the ring, but there is no such thing in an ellipse. Instead, there are two focal points, called the foci, as you will see presently.

Second. Draw a perpendicular line, B, which we’ll call the center of the ellipse, where it crosses line A. This point should not be confused with the focus. In a circle, the focus is the exact center of the ring, but that’s not the case for an ellipse. Instead, there are two focal points, known as the foci, as you will see shortly.

Third. Step off two points or marking places, as we shall term them, equidistant from the line B, and marked C, C. These marks will then represent the diameter of the ellipse across its major axis.

Third. Step off two points or marking places, which we'll call C, C, that are the same distance from line B. These marks will then represent the diameter of the ellipse across its major axis.

Fourth. We must now get the diameter of the minor axis, along the line B. This distance will depend on the perspective you have of the figure. If you look at a disk at an angle of about 30 degrees it will be half of the distance across the major axis

Fourth. We now need to find the diameter of the minor axis along the line B. This distance will depend on how you view the figure. If you look at a disk from an angle of about 30 degrees, it will be half of the distance across the major axis.

p. 106

So you may understand this examine Fig. 114. The first sketch shows the eye looking directly at the disk 1. In the second sketch the disk is at 30 degrees, and now the lines 2 2, from the eye, indicate that it is just half the width that it was when the lines 3 3 were projected. The marks D D, therefore, indicate the distance across the minor axis in Fig. 113.

So you can understand this, take a look at Fig. 114. The first sketch shows the eye looking straight at the disk 1. In the second sketch, the disk is tilted at 30 degrees, and now the lines 2 2, coming from the eye, show that it appears to be just half the width it was when the lines 3 3 were drawn. The marks D D, therefore, show the distance across the minor axis in Fig. 113.

Fig. 114. Perspection in Angles Fig. 114. Perspective in Angles ToList

Fifth. We must now find the focal points of the ellipse. If the line A on each side of the cross line B is divided into four parts, the outer marks E may be used for the foci, and will be the places where the point of the compass, or bow pen, is to be placed.

Fifth. We need to find the focal points of the ellipse. If we divide the line A on each side of the cross line B into four parts, we can use the outer marks E as the foci, which is where the point of the compass or bow pen should be placed.

Sixth. Describe a circle F, so it passes through the mark C, and move the point of the compass to the center of the ellipse, at the star, and describe a circle line G, from the mark C to the line B. This will give a centering point H. Then draw a line I from H to E, and extend it through the circle F.

Sixth. Draw a circle F that goes through the point C, then move the compass to the center of the ellipse at the star and draw a circle line G, from point C to line B. This will create a centering point H. Next, draw a line I from H to E and extend it through circle F.

Seventh. If the point of the compass is now putp. 107 at H, and the pencil or pen on the circle line F, the curve J can be drawn, so the latter curve and the curve F will thus merge perfectly at the line I.

Seventh. If the compass point is now placed at Hp. 107 and the pencil or pen is on the circle line F, the curve J can be drawn, so that both curves J and F will perfectly connect at line I.

The Focal Points.—The focal points can be selected at any arbitrary point, between C and the line B, and the point H may be moved closer to or farther away from the line A, and you will succeed in making the ellipse correct, if you observe one thing, namely: The line I, which must always run from H to E, and intersects the circle F, is the starting or the ending point for the small curve F or the large circle J.

The Main Points.—You can choose the focal points at any random spot between C and line B, and you can move point H closer to or farther from line A. You'll be able to correctly create the ellipse as long as you remember one thing: The line I, which should always go from H to E and intersects circle F, is the starting or ending point for the small curve F or the large circle J.

Figs. 115-117. Perspectives of Cubes Figs. 115-117. Views of Cubes ToList

Isometric and Perspective.—A figure may be drawn so as to show an isometric or a perspective view. Thus, a cube can be drawn so as to make an isometric figure, as in Fig. 115, where the three sides are equal to each other.

Isometric and Perspective.—A shape can be drawn to display either an isometric or a perspective view. For example, a cube can be illustrated to create an isometric figure, as seen in Fig. 115, where all three sides are equal in length.

Isometric means a method of drawing any object in such a manner that the height, length andp. 108 breadth may be shown in the proportion they really bear to each other. Fig. 115 has the sides not only equal to each other, in appearance to the eye, but they have the same outlines and angles.

Isometric refers to a way of illustrating any object so that the height, length, and p. 108 width are shown in the actual proportions they have in relation to one another. Fig. 115 has sides that are not only equal to each other visually but also share the same outlines and angles.

Contrast this figure with Figs. 116 and 117. In Fig. 116 two of the sides are equal in angles and outline; and in Fig. 117 each side has a different outline, and different angles. Nevertheless, all the cubes are, in reality, of the same dimension.

Contrast this figure with Figs. 116 and 117. In Fig. 116, two of the sides are equal in angles and shape; and in Fig. 117, each side has a different shape and different angles. Nevertheless, all the cubes are, in fact, the same size.

The Protractor.—This is a most useful tool for the draughtsman. It enables the user to readily find any angle. Fig. 118 shows an approved form of the tool for this purpose.

The protractor.—This is a very useful tool for the designer. It allows the user to easily find any angle. Fig. 118 shows a recommended version of the tool for this purpose.

Fig. 118. Protractor. Section Lining Metals Fig. 118. Protractor.
Section Lining Materials
ToList

Suggestions in Drawing.—As in the use of allp. 109 other tools, so with the drawing instrument, it must be kept in proper order. If the points are too fine they will cut the paper; if too blunt the lines will be ragged. In whetting the points hold the pen at an angle of 12 degrees. Don't make too long an angle or slope, and every time you sharpen hold it at the same angle, so that it is ground back, and not at the point only.

Drawing Suggestions.—Just like with any other tools, your drawing instruments need to be well maintained. If the tips are too sharp, they will tear the paper; if they're too dull, the lines will be uneven. When sharpening the tips, hold the pen at a 12-degree angle. Avoid making a long angle or slope, and make sure to hold it at the same angle each time you sharpen it, so that it is ground evenly and not just at the tip.

Fig. 119. Using the Protractor. Fig. 119. Using a Protractor. ToList

Holding the Pen.—The drawing pen should be held as nearly vertical as possible. Use the cleaning rag frequently. If the ink does not flow freely, after you have made a few strokes, as is frequently the case, gently press together the points. The least grit between the tines will cause an irregular flow

Holding the pen.—The drawing pen should be held as straight up as possible. Use the cleaning rag often. If the ink isn't flowing well after you've made a few strokes, which is often the case, gently press the points together. Even a tiny bit of grit between the tines can cause an uneven flow.

p. 110

Inks.—As prepared liquid inks are now universally used, a few suggestions might be well concerning them. After half the bottle has been used, add a half teaspoonful of water, shake it well, and then strain it through a fine cotton cloth. This will remove all grit and lint that is sure to get into the bottle however carefully it may be corked.

Inks.—Since prepared liquid inks are now widely used, here are a few tips regarding them. After using half of the bottle, add half a teaspoon of water, shake it well, and then strain it through a fine cotton cloth. This will get rid of any grit and lint that is likely to get into the bottle, no matter how carefully it's corked.

Fig. 120. Section Lining Metals Fig. 120. Section Lining Metals ToList

Tracing Cloth.—It is preferable to use the dull side of the tracing cloth for the reasons that, as the cloth is rolled with the glossy side inside, the figure when drawn on the other side will be uppermost, and will thus lie flat; and on the other hand, the ink will take better on the dull side.

Tracing Paper.—It's better to use the dull side of the tracing cloth because, since the cloth is rolled with the glossy side on the inside, the drawing on the other side will be on top and lie flat. Plus, the ink will adhere better to the dull side.

If the ink does not flow freely, use chalk, fine pumice stone, or talc, and rub it in well with a clean cloth, and then wipe off well before beginning to trace

If the ink isn’t flowing smoothly, use chalk, fine pumice stone, or talc, and rub it in well with a clean cloth. Then wipe it off thoroughly before you start tracing.

p. 111

Detail Paper.—The detail paper, on which the drawing is first made in pencil, should show the figure accurately, particularly the points where the bow pen are to be used, as well as the measurement points for the straight lines.

Detail Document.—The detail paper, where the drawing is initially created in pencil, should accurately represent the figure, especially the areas where the bow pen will be used, along with the measurement points for the straight lines.

How to Proceed.—Make the circles, curves, and irregular lines first, and then follow with the straight lines. Where the point of the circle pen must be used for a large number of lines, as, for instance, in shading, the smallest circles should be made first, and the largest circles last, because at every turn the centering hole becomes larger, and there is liability to make the circles more or less irregular. Such irregularity will not be so noticeable in the large curves as in the smaller ones.

Next Steps.—Start with the circles, curves, and uneven lines first, then move on to the straight lines. When using the point of the circle pen for a lot of lines, like in shading, create the smallest circles first and the largest ones last. This is because as you work, the centering hole gets bigger, which can make the circles more or less uneven. This unevenness won't stand out as much in the larger curves as it will in the smaller ones.

Indicating Material by the Section Lines.—In section lining different materials can be indicated by the character of the lines, shown in Fig. 120.

Indicating Material with Section Lines.—In section lining, different materials can be indicated by the type of lines, shown in Fig. 120.


CHAPTER IXToC

TREATMENT AND USE OF METALS

Annealing.—A very important part of the novice's education is a knowledge pertaining to the annealing of metals. Unlike the artisan in wood, who works the materials as he finds them, the machinist can, and, in fact, with many of the substances, must prepare them so they can be handled or cut by the tools.

Annealing.—A crucial aspect of a beginner's education is understanding how to anneal metals. Unlike a woodworker who uses materials as they are, a machinist can, and often must, prepare many substances so that they can be worked with or cut using tools.

Annealing is one of the steps necessary with all cutting tools, and it is an absolute requirement with many metals for ordinary use, as well as for many other articles like glass. This is particularly true in the use of copper.

Annealing is one of the crucial steps for all cutting tools, and it's essential for many metals used in everyday applications, as well as for various other items like glass. This is especially true for copper.

Toughness and Elasticity.—It means the putting of metals in such a condition that they will not only be less brittle, but also tougher and more elastic. Many substances, like glass, must be annealed before they can be put in condition for use, as this material when first turned out is so brittle that the slightest touch will shatter it, so that it must be toughened.

Strength and Flexibility.—It refers to treating metals so they become not only less brittle but also tougher and more elastic. Many materials, like glass, need to be annealed before they can be used, because when they are first made, they are so brittle that even the slightest touch can break them, so they have to be toughened.

Malleable or wrought iron, if subjected to pressure, becomes brittle, and it is necessary to anneal it. Otherwise, if used, for instance, for boilerp. 113 plates, from the rolled sheets, it would stand but little pressure.

Malleable or wrought iron, when put under pressure, becomes brittle, so it needs to be annealed. Otherwise, if it's used, for example, for boilerp. 113 plates made from rolled sheets, it wouldn’t be able to handle much pressure.

The most immediate use the boy will have is the treatment of steel. He must learn the necessity of this process, and that of tempering, in all his cutting tools, and in the making of machinery where some parts are required to be constructed of very hard metal.

The boy's most immediate task will be working with steel. He needs to understand the importance of this process, along with tempering, for all his cutting tools and in creating machinery where certain parts need to be made from very hard metal.

The Process.—To anneal steel it must be heated to a bright cherry red and then gradually cooled down. For this purpose a bed of fine charcoal, or iron filings and lime, is prepared, in which the article is embedded, and permitted to remain until it is cold.

The Process.—To anneal steel, you need to heat it to a bright cherry red and then let it cool down slowly. For this, prepare a bed of fine charcoal or a mix of iron filings and lime, where the item is placed and allowed to stay until it cools completely.

There are many ways of doing the work, particularly in the use of substances which will the most readily give up their carbon to the tool. Yellow prussiate of potash is an excellent medium, and this is sprinkled over the cherry-heated article to be annealed. The process may be repeated several times.

There are many ways to do the work, especially when it comes to using substances that easily release their carbon to the tool. Yellow prussiate of potash is a great medium, and it's sprinkled over the cherry-heated item to be annealed. This process can be repeated several times.

Tempering.—This is the reverse of annealing as understood in the art. The word itself does not mean to "harden," but to put into some intermediate state. For instance, "tempered clay" means a clay which has been softened so it can be readily worked.

Tempering.—This is the opposite of annealing as it's understood in the craft. The word itself doesn’t mean to "harden," but to move into an intermediate state. For example, "tempered clay" refers to clay that has been softened so it can be easily shaped.

On the other hand, a tempered steel tool is put into a condition where it is hardened, but this hardp. 114ness is also accompanied by another quality, namely, toughness. For this reason, the word temper, and not hardness, is referred to. A lathe tool, if merely hardened, would be useless for that purpose.

On the other hand, a tempered steel tool is treated to become hard, but this hardness is also paired with another quality, namely, toughness. That's why the term temper, not hardness, is used. A lathe tool that is only hardened would be ineffective for that purpose.

Tempering Contrasted with Annealing.—It will be observed that in annealing three things are necessary: First, heating to a certain temperature; second, cooling slowly; third, the particular manner of cooling it.

Tempering vs. Annealing.—In annealing, three things are essential: First, heating to a specific temperature; second, cooling down slowly; third, the specific way of cooling it.

In tempering, on the other hand, three things are also necessary:

In tempering, however, three things are also necessary:

First: The heating temperature should be a dull red, which is less than the annealing heat.

First: The heating temperature should be a dull red, which is lower than the annealing heat.

Second: Instead of cooling slowly the article tempered is dipped into a liquid which suddenly chills it.

Second: Instead of cooling slowly, the tempered item is dipped into a liquid that quickly cools it.

Third: The materials used vary, but if the article is plunged into an unguent made of mercury and bacon fat, it will impart a high degree of toughness and elasticity.

Third: The materials used differ, but if the article is dipped in a mix of mercury and bacon grease, it will gain a high level of toughness and elasticity.

Materials Used.—Various oils, fats and rosins are also used, and some acids in water are also valuable for this purpose. Care should be taken to have sufficient amount of liquid in the bath so as not to evaporate it or heat it up too much when it receives the heated body.

Materials Used.—Different oils, fats, and resins are used, and some acids in water are also useful for this purpose. It's important to ensure there's enough liquid in the bath to prevent evaporation or overheating when the heated object is placed in it.

Different parts of certain articles require varying degrees of hardness, like the tangs of files. Thep. 115 cutting body of the file must be extremely hard, and rather brittle than tough. If the tang should be of the same hardness it would readily break.

Different parts of some tools need different levels of hardness, like the tangs of files. Thep. 115 cutting edge of the file has to be very hard and more brittle than tough. If the tang were as hard as the cutting edge, it would easily break.

Gradual Tempering.—To prevent this, some substance like soap suds may be used to cool down the tang, so that toughness without hardness is imparted.

Gradual Tempering.—To avoid this, a substance like soap suds can be used to cool down the tang, providing toughness without hardness.

The tempering, or hardening, like the annealing process, may be repeated several times in succession, and at each successive heating the article is put at a higher temperature.

The tempering, or hardening, just like the annealing process, can be repeated multiple times in a row, and with each heating, the item is set to a higher temperature.

If any part of a body, as, for instance, a hammerhead, should require hardening, it may be plunged into the liquid for a short distance only, and this will harden the pole or peon while leaving the other part of the head soft, or annealed.

If any part of a body, like a hammerhead, needs to be hardened, it can be dipped into the liquid just a short way. This will harden the pole or peon while keeping the rest of the head soft or annealed.

Glycerine is a good tempering substance, and to this may be added a small amount of sulphate of potash.

Glycerin is a good tempering agent, and you can add a small amount of potassium sulfate to it.

Fluxing.—The word flux means to fuse or to melt, or to put into a liquid state. The office of a flux is to facilitate the fusion of metals. But fluxes do two things. They not only aid the conversion of the metal into a fluid state, but also serve as a means for facilitating the unity of several metals which make up the alloy, and aid in uniting the parts of metals to be joined in the welding of parts

Flowing.—The term flux refers to the process of melting or turning something into a liquid state. The purpose of a flux is to help metals fuse together. However, fluxes serve two key functions. They not only assist in turning the metal into a liquid but also help combine different metals that form an alloy and aid in joining metal parts during welding.

p. 116

Uniting Metals.—Metals are united in three ways, where heat is used:

Uniting Metals.—Metals are joined together in three ways that use heat:

First: By heating two or more of them to such a high temperature that they melt and form a compound, or an alloy, as it is called.

First: By heating two or more of them to such a high temperature that they melt and form a compound, or an alloy, as it is called.

Second: By heating up the points to be joined, and then lapping the pieces and hammering the parts. This is called forge work or welding.

Second: By heating up the areas to be joined, then overlapping the pieces and hammering the parts together. This is called forge work or welding.

Third: By not heating the adjacent parts and using an easily fusible metal, which is heated up and run between the two, by means of a soldering iron.

Third: By not heating the nearby areas and using a metal that melts easily, which is heated and flowed between the two surfaces with a soldering iron.

The foreign material used in the first is called a flux; in the second it is termed a welding compound; and in the third it is known as a soldering acid, or soldering fluid.

The foreign material used in the first is called a flux; in the second, it’s referred to as a welding compound; and in the third, it’s known as a soldering acid or soldering fluid.

The boy is not so much interested in the first process, from the standpoint of actual work, but it is necessary that he should have some understanding of it.

The boy isn’t really interested in the first process in terms of the actual work, but it’s important for him to have some understanding of it.

It may be said, as to fluxes, generally, that they are intended to promote the fusion of the liquefying metals, and the elements used are the alkalis, such as borax, tartar, limestone, or fluor spar.

It can be said that fluxes are generally meant to help melt the metals, and the materials used include alkalis like borax, tartar, limestone, or fluor spar.

These substances act as reducing or oxidizing agents. The most important are carbonate of soda, potash, and cyanide of potassium. Limestone is used as the flux in iron-smelting

These substances work as reducing or oxidizing agents. The most important ones are baking soda, potash, and potassium cyanide. Limestone is used as the flux in iron smelting.

p. 117

Welding Compounds.—Elsewhere formulas are given of the compounds most desirable to use. It is obvious that the application of these substances on the heated surfaces, is not only to facilitate the heating, but to prepare the articles in such a manner that they will more readily adhere to each other.

Welding Materials.—In other sections, formulas are provided for the most effective compounds to use. It's clear that applying these substances to heated surfaces not only makes heating easier but also prepares the items so they stick together better.

Oxidation.—Oxidation is the thing to guard against in welding. The moment a piece of metal, heated to whiteness, is exposed, the air coats it with a film which is called an oxide. To remove this the welding compound is applied.

Oxidation.—Oxidation is what you need to watch out for in welding. As soon as a piece of metal is heated to white-hot temperatures and is exposed to air, it gets a coating that’s called an oxide. To get rid of this, the welding compound is used.

The next office of the substance thus applied, is to serve as a medium for keeping the welding parts in a liquid condition as long as possible, and thus facilitate the unity of the joined elements.

The next role of the applied substance is to act as a medium that keeps the welding parts in a liquid state for as long as possible, thus helping the joined elements to bond together.

When the hammer beats the heated metals an additional increment of heat is imparted to the weld, due to the forcing together of the molecules of the iron, so that these two agencies, namely, the compound and the mechanical friction, act together to unite the particles of the metal.

When the hammer strikes the heated metals, extra heat is added to the weld because the molecules of the iron are pushed together. This means that both the chemical reactions and the mechanical friction work together to join the particles of the metal.

Soldering.—Here another principle is involved, namely, the use of an intermediate material between two parts which are to be united. The surfaces to be brought together must be thoroughly cleaned, using such agents as will prevent the formation of oxides.

Welding.—Here another principle is involved, specifically the use of a material that serves as a bridge between two parts that need to be joined. The surfaces that will be connected need to be completely cleaned using agents that will stop the creation of oxides.

The parts to be united may be of the same, or ofp. 118 different materials, and it is in this particular that the workman must be able to make a choice of the solder most available, and whether hard or soft.

The pieces that need to be joined can be made of the same or different materials, and it's essential for the worker to be able to choose the most suitable solder, whether it's hard or soft.

Soft Solder.—A soft solder is usually employed where lead, tin, or alloys of lead, tin and bismuth are to be soldered. These solders are all fusible at a low temperature, and they do not, as a result, have great strength.

Lead-Free Solder.—A soft solder is typically used when soldering lead, tin, or alloys made from lead, tin, and bismuth. These solders melt at low temperatures, which means they don't offer significant strength.

Bismuth is a metal which lowers the fusing point of any alloy of which it forms a part, while lead makes the solder less fusible.

Bismuth is a metal that lowers the melting point of any alloy it’s part of, while lead makes the solder less meltable.

Hard Solder.—These are so distinguished because they require a temperature above the low red to fuse them. The metals which are alloyed for this purpose are copper, silver, brass, zinc and tin. Various alloys are thus made which require a high temperature to flux properly, and these are the ones to use in joining steel to steel, the parts to be united requiring an intense furnace heat.

Hard Soldering.—These are recognized for needing a temperature higher than the low red range to melt. The metals used for this purpose include copper, silver, brass, zinc, and tin. Different alloys are created that need a high temperature to bond correctly, and these are the ones to use when joining steel to steel, with the pieces that need to be connected requiring intense furnace heat.

Spelter.—The alloy used for this purpose is termed "spelter," and brass, zinc and tin are its usual components. The hard solders are used for uniting brass, bronze, copper, and iron.

Zinc.—The alloy used for this purpose is called "spelter," and its typical components are brass, zinc, and tin. Hard solders are used to join brass, bronze, copper, and iron.

Whether soft or hard solder is used, it is obvious that it must melt at a lower temperature than the parts which are to be joined together.

Whether using soft or hard solder, it's clear that it needs to melt at a lower temperature than the parts being joined together.

There is one peculiarity with respect to alloys:p. 119 They melt at a lower temperature than either of the metals forming the alloys.

There’s one interesting thing about alloys:p. 119 They melt at a lower temperature than either of the metals that make them up.

Soldering Acid.—Before beginning the work of soldering, the parts must be cleaned by filing or sandpapering, and coated with an acid which neutralizes the oxygen of the air.

Soldering Flux.—Before you start soldering, you need to clean the parts by filing or using sandpaper, and then coat them with an acid that neutralizes the oxygen in the air.

This is usually muriatic acid, of which use, say, one quart and into this drop small pieces of zinc. This will effervesce during the time the acid is dissolving the zinc. When the boiling motion ceases, the liquid may be strained, or the dark pieces removed.

This is usually muriatic acid. Use about one quart and drop in small pieces of zinc. You’ll see it fizzing as the acid dissolves the zinc. When the bubbling stops, you can strain the liquid or remove the dark pieces.

The next step is to dissolve two ounces of sal ammoniac in a third of a pint of water, and in another vessel dissolve an ounce of chloride of tin.

The next step is to dissolve two ounces of sal ammoniac in a third of a pint of water, and in another container, dissolve an ounce of tin chloride.

Then mix the three solutions, and this can be placed in a bottle, or earthen jar or vessel, and it will keep indefinitely.

Then mix the three solutions, and you can put this in a bottle, earthen jar, or container, and it will last forever.

The Soldering Iron.—A large iron is always better than a small one, particularly for the reason that it will retain its heat better. This should always be kept tinned, which can be done by heating and plunging it into the soldering solution, and the solder will then adhere to the iron and cover the point, so that when the actual soldering takes place the solder will not creep away from the tool.

The soldering iron.—A large soldering iron is always preferable to a smaller one, mainly because it holds heat more effectively. It should always be kept tinned, which can be accomplished by heating it and dipping it into the soldering solution. This way, the solder will stick to the iron and coat the tip, ensuring that when you actually start soldering, the solder won’t slide off the tool.

By a little care and attention to these details, the work of uniting metals will be a pleasure. It is sop. 120 often the case, however, that the apparatus for doing this work is neglected in a shop; the acid is allowed to become dirty and full or foreign matter, and the different parts separated

By taking a little care and paying attention to these details, joining metals can be enjoyable. However, it's often the case that the tools for this work get overlooked in a workshop; the acid becomes dirty and contaminated with foreign substances, and the different parts get separated.


CHAPTER XToC

ON GEARING AND HOW ORDERED

The technical name for gears, the manner of measuring them, their pitch and like terms, are most confusing to the novice. As an aid to the understanding on this subject, the wheels are illustrated, showing the application of these terms.

The technical names for gears, how to measure them, their pitch, and similar terms can be really confusing for newcomers. To help clarify this topic, the wheels are illustrated to show how these terms apply.

Spur and Pinion.—When a gear is ordered a specification is necessary. The manufacturer will know what you mean if you use the proper terms, and you should learn the distinctions between spur and pinion, and why a bevel differs from a miter gear.

Spur and Pinion Gear.—When you order a gear, you need to provide a specification. The manufacturer will understand what you mean if you use the correct terms, so you should familiarize yourself with the differences between spur and pinion, and why a bevel is not the same as a miter gear.

If the gears on two parallel shafts mesh with each other, they both may be of the same diameter, or one may be larger than the other. In the latter case, the small one is the pinion, and the larger one the spur wheel.

If the gears on two parallel shafts interlock, they can either be the same size or one can be bigger than the other. In the second case, the smaller gear is called the pinion, and the larger gear is the spur wheel.

Some manufacturers use the word "gear" for "pinion," so that, in ordering, they call them gear and pinion, in speaking of the large and small wheels.

Some manufacturers use the term "gear" to mean "pinion," so when they place an order, they refer to them as gear and pinion, when talking about the large and small wheels.

Measuring a Gear.—The first thing to specify would be the diameter. Now a spur gear, as well as a pinion, has three diameters; one measurep. 122 across the outer extremities of the teeth; one measure across the wheel from the base of the teeth; and the distance across the wheel at a point midway between the base and end of the teeth.

Measuring a gear.—The first thing to determine is the diameter. A spur gear and a pinion both have three diameters: one measurement across the outer edges of the teeth; one measurement across the wheel from the base of the teeth; and the distance across the wheel at a point halfway between the base and the tip of the teeth.

These three measurements are called, respectively, "outside diameter," "inside diameter," and "pitch diameter." When the word diameter is used, as applied to a gear wheel, it is always understood to mean the "pitch diameter."

These three measurements are referred to as "outside diameter," "inside diameter," and "pitch diameter." When the term diameter is used in relation to a gear wheel, it’s always understood to mean the "pitch diameter."

Fig. 121. Spur Gears Fig. 121. Spur Gears ToList

Pitch.—This term is the most difficult to understand. When two gears of equal size mesh together, the pitch line, or the pitch circle, as it isp. 123 also called, is exactly midway between the centers of the two wheels.

Pledge.—This term is the hardest to grasp. When two gears of equal size fit together, the pitch line, or the pitch circle, as it isp. 123 also known, is located exactly halfway between the centers of the two wheels.

Fig. 122. Miter Gear Pitch Fig. 122. Miter Gear Pitch ToList

Now the number of teeth in a gear is calculated on the pitch line, and this is called:

Now, the number of teeth in a gear is calculated based on the pitch line, and this is called:

Diametral Pitch.—To illustrate: If a gear has 40 teeth, and the pitch diameter of the wheel is 4 inches, there are 10 teeth to each inch of the pitch diameter, and the gear is then 10 diametral pitch.

Diametral Pitch.—To illustrate: If a gear has 40 teeth, and the pitch diameter of the wheel is 4 inches, there are 10 teeth for every inch of the pitch diameter, making the gear have a diametral pitch of 10.

Circular Pitch.—Now the term "circular pitch" grows out of the necessity of getting the measurement of the distance from the center of one toothp. 124 to the center of the next, and it is measured along the pitch line.

Circular Pitch.—The term "circular pitch" comes from the need to measure the distance from the center of one toothp. 124 to the center of the next, and it's measured along the pitch line.

Supposing you wanted to know the number of teeth in a gear where the pitch diameter and the diametral pitch are given. You would proceed as follows: Let the diameter of the pitch circle be 10 inches, and the diameter of the diametral pitch be 4 inches. Multiplying these together the product is 40, thus giving the number of teeth.

Suppose you want to figure out how many teeth are in a gear when you know the pitch diameter and the diametral pitch. Here's what you'd do: Let the diameter of the pitch circle be 10 inches, and the diameter of the diametral pitch be 4 inches. When you multiply these together, the product is 40, which gives you the number of teeth.

Fig. 123. Bevel Gears. Fig. 123. Bevel Gears. ToList

It will thus be seen that if you have an idea of the diametral pitch and circular pitch, you can pretty fairly judge of the size that the teeth will be, and thus enable you to determine about what kind of teeth you should order

It can be seen that if you know the diametral pitch and circular pitch, you can get a good idea of the size of the teeth, allowing you to figure out what type of teeth you should order.

p. 125

How to Order a Gear.—In proceeding to order, therefore, you may give the pitch, or the diameter of the pitch circle, in which latter case the manufacturer of the gear will understand how to determine the number of the teeth. In case the intermeshing gears are of different diameters, state the number of teeth in the gear and also in the pinion, or indicate what the relative speed shall be.

How to Order Gear.—When placing your order, you can provide either the pitch or the diameter of the pitch circle. If you choose the latter, the gear manufacturer will know how to figure out the number of teeth. If the intermeshing gears have different diameters, make sure to specify the number of teeth for both the gear and the pinion, or indicate what the desired relative speed should be.

Fig. 124. Miter Gears. Fig. 124. Miter Gears. ToList

This should be followed by the diameter of the hole in the gear and also in the pinion; the backing of both gear and pinion; the width of the face; the diameter of the gear hub; diameter of the pinion hub; and, finally, whether the gears are to be fastened to the shafts by key-ways or set-screws.

This should be followed by the diameter of the hole in both the gear and the pinion; the backing of both the gear and pinion; the width of the face; the diameter of the gear hub; the diameter of the pinion hub; and, finally, whether the gears will be attached to the shafts using keyways or set screws.

Fig. 122 shows a sample pair of miter gears,p. 126 with the measurements to indicate how to make the drawings. Fig. 123 shows the bevel gears.

Fig. 122 shows a sample pair of miter gears,p. 126 along with the measurements to guide you in making the drawings. Fig. 123 displays the bevel gears.

Bevel and Miter Gears.—When two intermeshing gears are on shafts which are at right angles to each other, they may be equal diametrically, or of different sizes. If both are of the same diameter, they are called bevel gears; if of different diameters, miter gears.

Bevel and Miter Gears.—When two interlocking gears are on shafts that are at right angles to each other, they can either be the same size or different sizes. If both gears are the same diameter, they are called bevel gears; if they have different diameters, they are referred to as miter gears.

Fig. 125. Sprocket Wheel. Fig. 125. Sprocket Wheel. ToList

It is, in ordering gears of this character, that the novice finds it most difficult to know just what to do. In this case it is necessary to get the proper relation of speed between the two gears, and, for convenience, we shall, in the drawing, make the gears in the relation of 2 to 1.

It is when arranging gears like this that beginners find it hardest to figure out what to do. In this situation, it's essential to establish the right speed relationship between the two gears, and for simplicity, we'll show the gears in a 2 to 1 ratio in the drawing.

Drawing Gears.—Draw two lines at right angles,p. 127 Fig. 124, as 1 and 2, marking off the sizes of the two wheels at the points 3, 4. Then draw a vertical line (A) midway between the marks of the line 2, and this will be the center of the main pinion.

Drawing Gears.—Draw two lines at right angles,p. 127 Fig. 124, as 1 and 2, marking the sizes of the two wheels at points 3 and 4. Then draw a vertical line (A) halfway between the marks of line 2, and this will be the center of the main pinion.

Also draw a horizontal line (B) midway between the marks on the vertical line (1), and this will represent the center of the small gear. These two cross lines (A, B) constitute the intersecting axes of the two wheels, and a line (5), drawn from the mark (3 to 4), and another line (6), from the axes to the intersecting points of the lines (1, 2), will give the pitch line angles of the two wheels.

Also, draw a horizontal line (B) halfway between the marks on the vertical line (1), which will represent the center of the small gear. These two cross lines (A, B) form the intersecting axes of the two wheels, and a line (5), drawn from the mark (3 to 4), along with another line (6), from the axes to the intersecting points of the lines (1, 2), will provide the pitch line angles of the two wheels.

Sprocket Wheels.—For sprocket wheels the pitch line passes centrally through the rollers (A) of the chain, as shown in Fig. 125, and the pitch of the chain is that distance between the centers of two adjacent rollers. In this case the cut of the teeth is determined by the chain

Sprocket Wheels.—For sprocket wheels, the pitch line runs straight through the center of the rollers (A) of the chain, as shown in Fig. 125, and the pitch of the chain is the distance between the centers of two neighboring rollers. In this scenario, the shape of the teeth is defined by the chain.


CHAPTER XIToC

MECHANICAL POWERS

The Lever.—The lever is the most wonderful mechanical element in the world. The expression, lever, is not employed in the sense of a stick or a bar which is used against a fulcrum to lift or push something with, but as the type of numerous devices which employ the same principle.

The Lever.—The lever is the most amazing mechanical component in the world. The term lever doesn't just refer to a stick or bar used against a fulcrum to lift or push something, but also to various devices that use the same principle.

Some of these devices are, the wedge, the screw, the pulley and the inclined plane. In some form or other, one or more of these are used in every piece of mechanism in the world.

Some of these devices are the wedge, the screw, the pulley, and the inclined plane. In one way or another, one or more of these are used in every mechanism in the world.

Because the lever enables the user to raise or move an object hundreds of times heavier than is possible without it, has led thousands of people to misunderstand its meaning, because it has the appearance, to the ignorant, of being able to manufacture power.

Because the lever lets the user lift or move something that's hundreds of times heavier than they could on their own, it has caused thousands of people to misunderstand its meaning, as it seems to those who don’t know any better that it can create power.

Wrong Inferences from Use of Lever.—This lack of knowledge of first principles, has bred and is now breeding, so-called perpetual motion inventors (?) all over the civilized world. It is surprising how many men, to say nothing of boys, actually believe that power can be made without the expenditure of something which equalizes it

Misleading Conclusions from Using Leverage.—This lack of understanding of basic principles has created and continues to create so-called perpetual motion inventors (?) all over the civilized world. It's astonishing how many people, not to mention young boys, truly believe that power can be generated without the use of something that balances it out.

p. 129

The boy should not be led astray in this particular, and I shall try to make the matter plain by using the simple lever to illustrate the fact that whenever power is exerted some form of energy is expended.

The boy shouldn't be misled in this regard, and I will try to clarify the issue by using a simple lever to demonstrate that whenever power is applied, some form of energy is used up.

In Fig. 126 is a lever (A), resting on a fulcrum (B), the fulcrum being so placed that the lever is four times longer on one side than on the other. A weight (C) of 4 pounds is placed on the short end, and a 1-pound weight (D), called the power, on the short end. It will thus be seen that the lever is balanced by the two weights, or that the weight and the power are equal.

In Fig. 126 is a lever (A) resting on a fulcrum (B). The fulcrum is positioned in such a way that the lever is four times longer on one side than on the other. A weight (C) of 4 pounds is placed on the shorter end, and a 1-pound weight (D), referred to as the power, is on the shorter end as well. Thus, it's clear that the lever is balanced by the two weights, meaning the weight and the power are equal.

Fig. 126. Simple Lever Fig. 126. Basic Lever ToList

The Lever Principle.—Now, without stopping to inquire, the boy will say: "Certainly, I can understand that. As the lever is four times longer on one side of the fulcrum than on the other side, it requires only one-fourth of the weight to balance the four pounds. But suppose I push down the lever, at the point where the weight (D) is,p. 130 then, for every pound I push down I can raise four pounds at C. In that case do I not produce four times the power?"

The Lever Principle.—Now, without pausing to think, the boy says: "Sure, I get that. Since the lever is four times longer on one side of the fulcrum than on the other, it only takes one-fourth of the weight to balance four pounds. But if I push down on the lever where the weight (D) is,p. 130 then for every pound I push down, I can lift four pounds at C. So don't I create four times the power?"

I answer, yes. But while I produce that power I am losing something which is equal to the power gained. What is that?

I say yes. But while I create that power, I am losing something that is equal to the power I've gained. What is it?

Fig. 127. Lever Action Fig. 127. Lever Action ToList

First: Look at Fig. 127; the distance traveled. The long end of the lever is at its highest point, which is A; and the short end of the lever is at its lowest point C. When the long end of the lever is pushed down, so it is at B, it moves four times farther than the short end moves upwardly, as the distance from C to D is just one-fourth that from A to B. The energy expended in moving four times the distance balances the power gained.

First: Look at Fig. 127; the distance traveled. The long end of the lever is at its highest point, which is A; and the short end of the lever is at its lowest point C. When the long end of the lever is pushed down to B, it moves four times farther than the short end moves up, since the distance from C to D is only one-fourth that from A to B. The energy spent in moving four times the distance balances the power gained.

Power vs. Distance Traveled.—From this the following law is deduced: That whatever is gained in power is lost in the distance traveled

Power vs. Distance Traveled.—From this, we derive the following rule: Whatever power is gained is lost in the distance traveled.

p. 131

Second: Using the same figure, supposing it was necessary to raise the short end of the lever, from C to D, in one second of time. In that case the hand pressing down the long end of the lever, would go from A to B in one second of time; or it would go four times as far as the short end, in the same time.

Second: Using the same figure, let's say it was necessary to raise the short end of the lever, from C to D, in one second. In that case, the hand pressing down on the long end of the lever would move from A to B in one second; or it would travel four times as far as the short end, in the same amount of time.

Power vs. Loss in Time.—This means another law: That what is gained in power is lost in time.

Power vs. Loss Over Time.—This means another principle: That whatever you gain in power, you lose in time.

Distinguish clearly between these two motions. In the first case the long end of the lever is moved down from A to B in four seconds, and it had to travel four times the distance that the short end moves in going from C to D.

Distinguish clearly between these two movements. In the first case, the long end of the lever is lowered from A to B in four seconds, and it had to cover four times the distance that the short end moves from C to D.

In the second case the long end is moved down, from A to B, in one second of time, and it had to go that distance in one-fourth of the time, so that four times as much energy was expended in the same time to raise the short end from C to D.

In the second case, the long end is moved down from A to B in one second. It had to cover that distance in one-fourth of the time, meaning four times as much energy was used in the same time to lift the short end from C to D.

Wrongly Directed Energy.—More men have gone astray on the simple question of the power of the lever than on any other subject in mechanics. The writer has known instances where men knew the principles involved in the lever, who would still insist on trying to work out mechanical devices in which pulleys and gearing were involved, without seeming to understand that thosep. 132 mechanical devices are absolutely the same in principle.

Misguided Energy.—More people have gone off track regarding the power of the lever than on any other topic in mechanics. The author has seen cases where individuals understood the principles of the lever but still insisted on trying to create mechanical devices involving pulleys and gears, without seeming to realize that thosep. 132 mechanical devices are fundamentally the same in principle.

This will be made plain by a few illustrations. In Fig. 128, A is a pulley four times larger, diametrically, than B, and C is the pivot on which they turn. The pulleys are, of course, secured to each other. In this case we have the two weights, one of four pounds on the belt, which is on the small pulley (B), and a one-pound weight on the belt from the large pulley (A).

This will be clarified with a few examples. In Fig. 128, A is a pulley that is four times larger in diameter than B, and C is the pivot on which they rotate. The pulleys are, of course, attached to each other. In this scenario, we have two weights: one of four pounds on the belt attached to the small pulley (B), and a one-pound weight on the belt from the large pulley (A).

Fig. 128. The Pulley Fig. 128. The Pulley ToList

The Lever and the Pulley.—If we should substitute a lever (D) for the pulleys, the similarity to the lever (Fig. 127) would be apparent at once. The pivot (C) in this case would act the same as the pivot (C) in the lever illustration.

The Lever and the Pulley.—If we replace the pulleys with a lever (D), the similarity to the lever (Fig. 127) would be clear right away. The pivot (C) here would function just like the pivot (C) in the lever example.

In the same manner, and for like reasons, thep. 133 wedge, the screw and the incline plane, are different structural applications of the principles set forth in the lever.

In the same way, and for similar reasons, thep. 133 wedge, the screw, and the inclined plane are different structural applications of the principles outlined in the lever.

Whenever two gears are connected together, the lever principle is used, whether they are the same in size, diametrically, or not. If they are the same size then no change in power results; but instead, thereof, a change takes place in the direction of the motion.

Whenever two gears are connected, the lever principle comes into play, regardless of whether they are the same size or not. If they are the same size, there’s no change in power; instead, the direction of the motion changes.

Fig. 129. Change of Direction Fig. 130. Change of Direction
Fig. 129. Fig. 130.
Change of Direction ToList

When one end of the lever (A) goes down, the other end goes up, as shown in Fig. 129; and in Fig. 130, when the shaft (C) of one wheel turns in one direction, the shaft of the other wheel turns in the opposite direction.

When one side of the lever (A) goes down, the other side goes up, as shown in Fig. 129; and in Fig. 130, when the shaft (C) of one wheel spins in one direction, the shaft of the other wheel spins in the opposite direction.

It is plain that a gear, like a lever, may change direction as well as increase or decrease power. It is the thorough knowledge of these facts, and their application, which enables man to make the wonderful machinery we see on every hand.

It's clear that a gear, similar to a lever, can change direction and also amplify or reduce power. It's the deep understanding of these principles and their application that allows people to create the amazing machinery we see all around us.

Sources of Power.—Power is derived from ap. 134 variety of sources, but what are called the prime movers are derived from heat, through the various fuels, from water, from the winds and from the tides and waves of the ocean. In the case of water the power depends on the head, or height, of the surface of the water above the discharging orifice.

Power Sources.—Power comes from different sources, but what we refer to as the prime movers come from heat produced by various fuels, from water, from wind, and from the tides and waves of the ocean. When it comes to water, the power relies on the head, or height, of the water surface above the discharge opening.

Water Power.—A column of water an inch square and 28 inches high gives a pressure at the base of one pound; and the pressure at the lower end is equal in all directions. If a tank of water 28 inches high has a single orifice in its bottom 1" x 1" in size, the pressure of water through that opening will be only one pound, and it will be one pound through every other orifice in the bottom of the same size.

Hydropower.—A column of water that is one inch square and 28 inches tall exerts a pressure of one pound at the base, and this pressure is equal in all directions at the bottom. If you have a tank of water that is 28 inches high with a single opening at the bottom measuring 1" x 1", the water pressure pushing through that opening will be just one pound, and it will be one pound through any other opening at the bottom of the same size.

Calculating Fuel Energy.—Power from fuels depends upon the expansion of the materials consumed, or upon the fact that heat expands some element, like water, which in turn produces the power. One cubic inch of water, when converted into steam, has a volume equal to one cubic foot, or about 1,700 times increase in bulk.

Calculating Fuel Energy.—The energy generated from fuels relies on the expansion of the consumed materials, or on how heat makes certain substances, like water, expand, which then creates power. One cubic inch of water, when turned into steam, expands to a volume of one cubic foot, meaning it increases in size by about 1,700 times.

Advantage is taken of this in steam engine construction. If a cylinder has a piston in it with an area of 100 square inches, and a pipe one inch square supplies steam at 50 pounds pressure, the piston will have 50 pounds pressure on every square inch of its surface, equal to 5,000 pounds

Advantage is taken of this in steam engine construction. If a cylinder has a piston in it with an area of 100 square inches, and a pipe one square inch supplies steam at 50 pounds pressure, the piston will have 50 pounds pressure on every square inch of its surface, equal to 5,000 pounds.

p. 135

The Pressure or Head.—In addition to that there will also be 50 pounds pressure on each square inch of the head, as well as on the sides of the cylinder.

The Pressure or Head.—In addition to that, there will also be 50 pounds of pressure on each square inch of the head, as well as on the sides of the cylinder.

Fig. 131 shows a cylinder (A), a piston (B) and a steam inlet port (C), in which is indicated how the steam pressure acts equally in all directions. As, however, the piston is the only movable part, the force of the steam is directed to that part, and the motion is then transmitted to the crank, and to the shaft of the engine.

Fig. 131 shows a cylinder (A), a piston (B), and a steam inlet port (C), illustrating how the steam pressure acts equally in all directions. However, since the piston is the only moving part, the force of the steam is directed at that part, which then transfers the motion to the crank and the engine's shaft.

Fig. 131. Steam Pressure Fig. 132. Water Pressure
Fig. 131. Steam Pressure Fig. 132. Water Pressure ToList

This same thing applies to water which, as stated, is dependent on its head. Fig. 132 reprep. 136sents a cylinder (D) with a vertically movable piston (E) and a standpipe (F). Assuming that the pipe (F) is of sufficient height to give a pressure of 50 pounds to the square inch, then the piston (E) and the sides and head of the cylinder (D) would have 50 pounds pressure on every square inch of surface.

This same principle applies to water, which, as mentioned, depends on its head. Fig. 132 reprep. 136sents a cylinder (D) with a piston (E) that can move vertically, and a standpipe (F). If the pipe (F) is tall enough to create a pressure of 50 pounds per square inch, then the piston (E) and the sides and top of the cylinder (D) would experience 50 pounds of pressure on every square inch of surface.

Fuels.—In the use of fuels, such as the volatile hydrocarbons, the direct expansive power of the fuel gases developed, is used to move the piston back and forth. Engines so driven are called Internal Combustion Motors.

Fuels.—In using fuels like volatile hydrocarbons, the direct expanding power of the fuel gases is used to push the piston back and forth. Engines powered this way are called Internal Combustion Engines.

Power from Winds.—Another source of power is from the wind acting against wheels which have blades or vanes disposed at such angles that there is a direct conversion of a rectilinear force into circular motion.

Wind Power.—Another source of power comes from the wind pushing against wheels that have blades or vanes angled in a way that converts straight-line force into circular motion.

In this case power is derived from the force of the moving air and the calculation of energy developed is made by considering the pressure on each square foot of surface. The following table shows the force exerted at different speeds against a flat surface one foot square, held so that the wind strikes it squarely:p. 137

In this scenario, power comes from the force of the moving air, and we determine the energy produced by looking at the pressure on each square foot of surface. The table below displays the force exerted at various speeds against a flat surface that measures one square foot and is positioned to face the wind directly:p. 137

SPEED OF WIND PRESSURE SPEED OF WIND PRESSURE
                   
5Milesperhour   2oz. 35milesperhour 6lb.2oz.
10    88 40  8  
15  1lb.2 45  102
20  2  50  122
25  32 55  152
30  48 60  18  
                   

Varying Degrees of Pressure.—It is curious to notice how the increase in speed changes the pressure against the blade. Thus, a wind blowing 20 miles an hour shows 2 pounds pressure; whereas a wind twice that velocity, or 40 miles an hour, shows a pressure of 8 pounds, which is four times greater than at 20 miles.

Different Levels of Pressure.—It's interesting to see how the increase in speed affects the pressure on the blade. For example, a wind blowing at 20 miles per hour exerts 2 pounds of pressure; however, when the wind doubles to 40 miles per hour, the pressure increases to 8 pounds, which is four times greater than at 20 miles.

It differs, therefore, from the law with respect to water pressure, which is constant in relation to the height or the head—that is, for every 28 inches height of water a pound pressure is added.

It is different from the law regarding water pressure, which remains constant based on height or head—that is, for every 28 inches of water height, one pound of pressure is added.

Power from Waves and Tides.—Many attempts have been made to harness the waves and the tide and some of them have been successful. This effort has been directed to the work of converting the oscillations of the waves into a rotary motion, and also to take advantage of the to-and-fro movement of the tidal flow. There is a great field in this direction for the ingenious boy.

Energy from Waves and Tides.—Many efforts have been made to harness the energy of waves and tides, and some have been successful. This work involves converting the oscillations of waves into rotary motion and making use of the back-and-forth movement of tidal flow. There is a vast opportunity in this area for innovative young minds.

A Profitable Field.—In no direction of humanp. 138 enterprise is there such a wide and profitable field for work, as in the generation of power. It is constantly growing in prominence, and calls for the exercise of the skill of the engineer and the ingenuity of the mechanic. Efficiency and economy are the two great watchwords, and this is what the world is striving for. Success will come to him who can contribute to it in the smallest degree.

A Lucrative Industry.—There’s no area of humanp. 138 activity that offers such a vast and rewarding opportunity for work as power generation. It's becoming increasingly important and requires both the expertise of engineers and the creativity of mechanics. Efficiency and cost-effectiveness are the main goals, and that’s what the world is aiming for. Success will follow anyone who can make even the smallest contribution to it.

Capital is not looking for men who can cheapen the production of an article 50 per cent., but 1 per cent. The commercial world does not expect an article to be 100 per cent, better. Five per cent. would be an inducement for business

Capital isn't searching for people who can cut the production cost of an item by 50 percent, but by 1 percent. The business world doesn't anticipate an item being 100 percent better. A 5 percent improvement would motivate business.


CHAPTER XIIToC

ON MEASURES

Horse-power.—When work is performed it is designated as horse-power, usually indicated by the letters H. P.; but the unit of work is called a foot pound.

Horsepower.—When work is done, it’s referred to as horsepower, usually marked by the letters H. P.; however, the unit of work is called a foot pound.

If one pound should be lifted 550 feet in one second, or 550 pounds one foot in the same time, it would be designated as one horse-power. For that reason it is called a foot pound. Instead of using the figure to indicate the power exerted during one minute of time, the time is taken for a minute, in all calculations, so that 550 multiplied by the number of seconds, 60, in a minute, equals 33,000 foot pounds.

If one pound is lifted 550 feet in one second, or 550 pounds one foot in the same time, it’s called one horsepower. That’s why it’s referred to as a foot-pound. Instead of using that figure to show the power used in one second, calculations are generally done over a minute, so 550 multiplied by the 60 seconds in a minute equals 33,000 foot-pounds.

Foot Pounds.—The calculation of horse-power is in a large measure arbitrary. It was determined in this way: Experiments show that the heat expended in vaporizing 34 pounds of water per hour, develops a force equal to 33,000 foot pounds; and since it takes about 4 pounds of coal per hour to vaporize that amount of water, the heat developed by that quantity of coal develops the same force as that exercised by an average horse exerting his strength at ordinary work

Foot-Pound Force.—The calculation of horse-power is somewhat arbitrary. It was determined this way: Experiments show that the heat needed to vaporize 34 pounds of water per hour produces a force equal to 33,000 foot pounds; and since it takes about 4 pounds of coal per hour to vaporize that amount of water, the heat generated by that quantity of coal produces the same force as an average horse working at a normal effort.

p. 140

All power is expressed in foot pounds. Suppose a cannon ball of sufficient weight and speed strikes an object. If the impact should indicate 33,000 pounds it would not mean that the force employed was one horse-power, but that many foot pounds.

All power is measured in foot-pounds. If a cannonball of enough weight and speed hits something, and the impact shows 33,000 pounds, it doesn't mean the force used was one horsepower; it means it was many foot-pounds.

If there should be 60 impacts of 550 pounds each within a minute, it might be said that it would be equal to 1 horse-power, but the correct way to express it would be foot pounds.

If there are 60 impacts of 550 pounds each in a minute, it could be said that it amounts to 1 horsepower, but the right way to express it would be in foot-pounds.

So in every calculation, where power is to be calculated, first find out how many foot pounds are developed, and then use the unit of measure, 33,000, as the divisor to get the horse-power, if you wish to express it in that way.

So in every calculation where power needs to be calculated, first determine how many foot-pounds are produced, and then use 33,000 as the divisor to get the horsepower if you want to express it that way.

It must be understood, therefore, that horse-power is a simple unit of work, whereas a foot pound is a compound unit formed of a foot paired with the weight of a pound.

It should be understood, then, that horsepower is a straightforward unit of work, while a foot-pound is a combined unit made up of a foot combined with the weight of a pound.

Energy.—Now work and energy are two different things. Work is the overcoming of resistance of any kind, either by causing or changing motion, or maintaining it against the action of some other force.

Energy.—Now work and energy are two distinct concepts. Work involves overcoming any kind of resistance, whether by initiating or changing motion, or keeping it going against the influence of another force.

Energy, on the other hand, is the power of doing work. Falling water possesses energy; so does a stone poised on the edge of a cliff. In the case of water, it is called kinetic energy; in the stonep. 141 potential energy. A pound of pressure against the stone will cause the latter, in falling, to develop an enormous energy; so it will be seen that this property resides, or is within the thing itself. It will be well to remember these definitions.

Energy, on the other hand, is the ability to do work. Falling water has energy, and so does a stone sitting at the edge of a cliff. With water, this is called kinetic energy, while in the case of the stonep. 141, it’s referred to as potential energy. A pound of pressure on the stone will cause it to fall and generate a massive amount of energy; so it’s clear that this property exists within the object itself. It’s important to keep these definitions in mind.

How to Find Out the Power Developed.—The measure of power produced by an engine, or other source, is so interesting to boys that a sketch is given of a Prony Brake, which is the simplest form of the Dynamometer, as these measuring machines are called.

How to Determine the Power Generated.—The amount of power generated by an engine or any other source is fascinating to boys, so we provide a sketch of a Prony Brake, which is the simplest type of Dynamometer, as these measuring devices are known.

Fig. 133. Prony Brake Fig. 133. Prony Brake ToList

In the drawing (A) is the shaft, with a pulley (A´), which turns in the direction of the arrow (B). C is a lever which may be of any length. This has a block (C´), which fits on the pulley, and below the shaft, and surrounding it, are blocks (D) held against the pulley by a chain (E), the ends of the chain being attached to bolts (F) which pass through the block (C´) and lever (C)

In the drawing, (A) is the shaft, with a pulley (A´) that rotates in the direction of the arrow (B). C is a lever that can be any length. It has a block (C´) that fits onto the pulley, and below the shaft, there are blocks (D) pressed against the pulley by a chain (E), with the ends of the chain attached to bolts (F) that go through the block (C´) and lever (C).

p. 142

Nuts (G) serve to draw the bolts upwardly and thus tighten the blocks against the shaft. The free end of the lever has stops (H) above and below, so as to limit its movement. Weights (I) are suspended from the end of the lever.

Nuts (G) are used to pull the bolts up, tightening the blocks against the shaft. The free end of the lever has stops (H) on both the top and bottom to restrict its movement. Weights (I) are hung from the end of the lever.

Fig. 134. Speed Indicator Fig. 134. Speed Meter ToList

The Test.—The test is made as follows: The shaft is set in motion, and the nuts are tightened until its full power at the required speed is balanced by the weight put on the platform.

The Exam.—The test is conducted like this: The shaft is set in motion, and the nuts are tightened until its full power at the required speed is matched by the weight placed on the platform.

The following calculation can then be made:

The following calculation can then be made:

For our present purpose we shall assume that the diameter of the pulley (A´) is 4 inches; the length of the lever (C), 3 feet; the speed of the shaft (A) and the pulley, 210 revolutions per minute; and the weight 600 pounds.

For our current needs, let's assume that the diameter of the pulley (A´) is 4 inches, the length of the lever (C) is 3 feet, the shaft (A) and pulley speed is 210 revolutions per minute, and the weight is 600 pounds.

Now proceed as follows:

Sure! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.

(1) Multiply the diameter of the pulley (A´)p. 143 (4 inches) by 3.1416, and this will give the circumference 12.5664 inches; or, 1.0472 feet.

(1) Multiply the diameter of the pulley (A´)p. 143 (4 inches) by 3.1416, and that will give you the circumference of 12.5664 inches, or 1.0472 feet.

(2) Multiply this product (1.0472) by the revolutions per minute. 1.0472 × 210 = 219.912. This equals the speed of the periphery of the pulley.

(2) Multiply this product (1.0472) by the revolutions per minute. 1.0472 × 210 = 219.912. This equals the speed of the edge of the pulley.

(3) The next step is to get the length of the lever (C) from the center of the shaft (A) to the point from which the weights are suspended, and divide this by one-half of the diameter of the pulley (A´). 36" ÷ 2" = 18", or 1 1/2 feet. This is the leverage.

(3) The next step is to measure the length of the lever (C) from the center of the shaft (A) to the point where the weights are hanging, and divide that by half the diameter of the pulley (A´). 36" ÷ 2" = 18", or 1 1/2 feet. This is the leverage.

(4) Then multiply the weight in pounds by the leverage. 600 × 1 1/2 = 900.

(4) Then multiply the weight in pounds by the leverage. 600 × 1 1/2 = 900.

(5) Next multiply this product (900) by the speed, 900 × 219.912 = 197,920.8, which means foot pounds.

(5) Next, multiply this product (900) by the speed: 900 × 219.912 = 197,920.8, which means foot pounds.

(6) As each horse-power has 33,000 foot pounds, the last product should be divided by this figure, and we have 197,920.8 ÷ 33,000 = 5.99 H. P.

(6) Since each horsepower is 33,000 foot-pounds, we should divide the last product by this number, resulting in 197,920.8 ÷ 33,000 = 5.99 H.P.

The Foot Measure.—How long is a foot, and what is it determined by? It is an arbitrary measure. The human foot is the basis of the measurement. But what is the length of a man's foot? It varied in different countries from 9 to 21 inches.

Foot Measurement.—How long is a foot, and what determines its length? It’s an arbitrary measurement. The human foot serves as the standard for it. But what’s the actual length of a man’s foot? It varies in different countries, ranging from 9 to 21 inches.

In England, in early days, it was defined as a measure of length consisting of 12 inches, or 36 barleycorns laid end to end. But barleycorns differ in length as well as the human foot, so thep. 144 standard adopted is without any real foundation or reason.

In England, back in the day, it was defined as a measure of length made up of 12 inches, or 36 barleycorns lined up end to end. However, since barleycorns vary in length just like the human foot does, thep. 144 standard that was adopted has no solid basis or justification.

Weight.—To determine weight, however, a scientific standard was adopted. A gallon contains 8.33 pounds avoirdupois weight of distilled water. This gallon is divided up in two ways; one by weight, and the other by measurement.

Weight.—To determine weight, a scientific standard was established. A gallon contains 8.33 pounds of distilled water by avoirdupois weight. This gallon is divided in two ways: by weight and by measurement.

Each gallon contains 231 cubic inches of distilled water. As it has four quarts, each quart has 57 3/4 cubic inches, and as each quart is comprised of two pints, each pint has nearly 29 cubic inches.

Each gallon contains 231 cubic inches of distilled water. Since it has four quarts, each quart has 57 3/4 cubic inches, and because each quart is made up of two pints, each pint has almost 29 cubic inches.

The Gallon.—The legal gallon in the United States is equal to a cylindrical measure 7 inches in diameter and 6 inches deep.

The Gallon.—The legal gallon in the United States is a cylindrical measure that is 7 inches wide and 6 inches deep.

Notwithstanding the weights and dimensions of solids and liquids are thus fixed by following a scientific standard, the divisions into scruples, grains, pennyweights and tons, as well as cutting them up into pints, quarts and other units, is done without any system, and for this reason the need of a uniform method has been long considered by every country.

Notwithstanding that the weights and dimensions of solids and liquids are set by scientific standards, the divisions into scruples, grains, pennyweights, and tons, as well as their measurements in pints, quarts, and other units, are done haphazardly. Because of this, the need for a consistent method has been recognized by every country for a long time.

The Metric System.—As early as 1528, Fernal, a French physician, suggested the metric system. Our own government recognized the value of this plan when it established the system of coinage.

The Metric System.—As early as 1528, Fernal, a French doctor, proposed the metric system. Our government acknowledged the importance of this idea when it set up the system of coinage.

The principle lies in fixing a unit, such as a dolp. 145lar, or a pound, or a foot, and then making all divisions, or addition, in multiples of ten. Thus, we have one mill; ten mills to make a dime; ten dimes to make a dollar, and so on.

The principle involves establishing a unit, like a dollar, a pound, or a foot, and then performing all divisions or additions in multiples of ten. So, we have one mill; ten mills make a dime; ten dimes make a dollar, and so on.

Basis of Measurement.—The question arose, what to use as the basis of measurement, and it was proposed to use the earth itself, as the measure. For this purpose the meridian line running around the earth at the latitude of Paris was selected.

Measurement Criteria.—The question came up about what to use as a measurement standard, and it was suggested to use the Earth itself as the metric. For this, the meridian line circling the Earth at the latitude of Paris was chosen.

One-quarter of this measurement around the globe was found to be 393,707,900 inches, and this was divided into 10,000,000 parts. Each part, therefore, was a little over 39.37 inches in length, and this was called a meter, which means measure.

One-quarter of this measurement around the world was found to be 393,707,900 inches, and this was divided into 10,000,000 parts. Each part, therefore, was just over 39.37 inches long, and this was called a meter, which means measure.

A decimeter is one-tenth of that, namely, 3.937 inches; and a decameter 39.37, or ten times the meter, and so on.

A decimeter is one-tenth of a meter, which is 3.937 inches, and a decameter is 39.37 inches, or ten times the length of a meter, and so on.

For convenience the metrical table is given, showing lengths in feet and inches, in which only three decimal points are used.

For convenience, the measurement table is provided, displaying lengths in feet and inches, using only three decimal points.

Metrical Table, showing measurements in feet and inches:p. 146

Metric Table, showing measurements in feet and inches:p. 146

METRICAL TABLE, SHOWING MEASUREMENTS IN FEET
AND INCHES

Length  Inches Feet
Millimeter0.0390.003
Centimeter0.3930.032
Decimeter3.9370.328
Meter39.3703.280
Decameter393.70732.808
Hectometer3937.079328.089
Kilometer39370.7903280.899
Myriameter393707.90032808.992


METRIC SYSTEM, SHOWING THE EQUIVALENTS
IN OUR MEASURES

1 Myriameter = 5.4 nautical miles, or 6.21 statute miles.
1 Kilometer = 0.621 statute mile, or nearly 5/8 mile.
1 Hectometer = 109.4 yards.
1 Decameter = 0.497 chain, 1.988 rods.
1 Meter = 39.37 inches, or nearly 3 ft. 3 3/8 inches.
1 Decimeter = 3.937 inches.
1 Centimeter = 0.3937 inch.
1 Millimeter = 0.03937 inch.
1 Micron = 1/25400 inch.
1 Hectare = 2.471 acres.
1 Arc = 119.6 square yards.
1 Centaire, or square meter = 10.764 square feet. p. 147
1 Decastere = 13 cubic yards, or about 2 3/4 cords.
1 Stere, or cubic meter = 1.308 cubic yards, or 35.3 cubic feet.
1 Decistere = 3 1/2 cubic feet.
1 Kiloliter = 1 ton, 12 gal., 2 pints, 2 gills old wine measure.
1 Hectoliter = 22.01 Imperial gals., or 26.4 U. S. gals.
1 Decaliter = 2 gallons, 1 pint, 2 2 out of 5 gills, imperial measure, or 2 gals., 2 qts., 1 pt., 1/2 gill, U. S.
1 Liter = 1 pint, 3 gills, imperial, or 1 qt., 1/2 gill U. S. measure.
1 Decileter = 0.704 gill, imperial, or 0.845 gill U. S. measure.
1 Millier = 2,204.6 pounds avoirdupois.
1 Metric quintal = 2 hundredweight, less 3 1/2 pounds, or 220 pounds, 7 ounces.
1 Kilogram = 2 pounds, 3 ounces, 4 3/8 drams avoirdupois.
1 Hectogram = 3 ounces, 8 3/8 drams avoirdupois.
1 Decagram = 154.32 grains Troy.
1 Gram = 15.432 grains.
1 Decigram = 1.542 grain.
1 Centigram = 0.154 grain.
1 Milligram = 0.015 grain.

CHAPTER XIIIToC

USEFUL INFORMATION FOR THE WORKSHOP

To find the circumference of a circle: Multiply the diameter by 3.1416.

To find the circumference of a circle: Multiply the diameter by 3.1416.

To find the diameter of a circle: Multiply the circle by .31831.

To find the diameter of a circle: Multiply the circumference of the circle by 0.31831.

To find the area of a circle: Multiply the square of the diameter by .7854.

To find the area of a circle: Multiply the square of the diameter by 0.7854.

To find the area of a triangle: Multiply the base by one-half the perpendicular height.

To find the area of a triangle: Multiply the base by half of the perpendicular height.

To find the surface of a ball: Multiply the square of the diameter by 3.1416.

To find the surface area of a ball: Multiply the square of the diameter by 3.1416.

To find the solidity of a sphere: Multiply the cube of the diameter by .5236.

To find the volume of a sphere: Multiply the cube of the diameter by 0.5236.

To find the cubic contents of a cone: Multiply the area of the base by one-third the altitude.

To find the volume of a cone: Multiply the area of the base by one-third of the height.

Doubling the diameter of a pipe increases its capacity four times.

Doubling the diameter of a pipe increases its capacity by four times.

To find the pressure in pounds per square inch of a column of water: Multiply the height of the column in feet by .434.

To find the pressure in pounds per square inch of a column of water: Multiply the height of the column in feet by 0.434.

Standard Horse-power: The evaporation of 30 pounds of water per hour from a feed water temperature of 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit into steam at 70 pounds gauge pressure

Standard Horse-power: The evaporation of 30 pounds of water per hour from a feed water temperature of 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit into steam at 70 pounds gauge pressure

p. 149

To find the capacity of any tank in gallons: Square the diameter in inches, multiply by the length, and then by .0034.

To find the capacity of any tank in gallons: Square the diameter in inches, multiply by the length, and then by 0.0034.

In making patterns for aluminum castings provision must be made for shrinkage to a greater extent than with any other metal or alloy.

In creating patterns for aluminum castings, you need to account for shrinkage more than with any other metal or alloy.

The toughness of aluminum can be increased by adding a small per cent. of phosphorus.

The toughness of aluminum can be enhanced by adding a small percentage of phosphorus.

All alloys of metals having mercury are called amalgams.

All metal alloys that contain mercury are called amalgams.

A sheet of zinc suspended in the water of a boiler will produce an electrolytic action and prevent scaling to a considerable extent.

A sheet of zinc hanging in the water of a boiler will create an electrolytic action and significantly reduce scaling.

Hydrofluoric acid will not affect a pure diamond, but will dissolve all imitations.

Hydrofluoric acid won't harm a real diamond, but it will dissolve all imitations.

A strong solution of alum put into glue will make it insoluble in water.

A strong solution of alum added to glue will make it water-resistant.

A grindstone with one side harder than the other can have its flinty side softened by immersing that part in boiled linseed oil.

A grindstone with one side harder than the other can have its tough side softened by soaking that part in boiled linseed oil.

One barrel contains 3 3/4 cubic feet.

One barrel holds 3 3/4 cubic feet.

One cubic yard contains 7 barrels.

One cubic yard equals 7 barrels.

To find the speed of a driven pulley of a given diameter: Multiply the diameter of the driving pulley by its speed or number of revolutions. Divide this by the diameter of the driven pulley. The result will be the number of revolutions of the driven pulley

To find the speed of a driven pulley with a specific diameter: Multiply the diameter of the driving pulley by its speed or number of revolutions. Divide this by the diameter of the driven pulley. The result will be the number of revolutions of the driven pulley.

p. 150

To find the diameter of a driven pulley that shall make any given number of revolutions in the same time: Multiply the diameter of the driving pulley by its number of revolutions, and divide the product by the number of revolutions of the driven pulley.

To find the diameter of a driven pulley that needs to make a certain number of revolutions in the same amount of time: Multiply the diameter of the driving pulley by its number of revolutions, and then divide that result by the number of revolutions of the driven pulley.

A piece of the well-known tar soap held against the inside of a belt while running will prevent it from slipping, and will not injure the belt.

A piece of the famous tar soap placed against the inside of a belt while running will keep it from slipping and won't damage the belt.

Boiler scale is composed of the carbonate or the sulphate of lime. To prevent the formation it is necessary to use some substance which will precipitate these elements in the water. The cheapest and most universally used for this purpose are soda ash and caustic soda.

Boiler scale is made up of lime carbonate or sulfate. To stop it from forming, you need to use a substance that will precipitate these elements in the water. The most affordable and commonly used options for this are soda ash and caustic soda.

Gold bronze is merely a mixture of equal parts of oxide of tin and sulphur. To unite them they are heated for some time in an earthen retort.

Gold bronze is just a blend of equal parts of tin oxide and sulfur. To combine them, they are heated together for a while in a clay retort.

Rusted utensils may be cleaned of rust by applying either turpentine or kerosene oil, and allowing them to stand over night, when the excess may be wiped off. Clean afterwards with fine emery cloth.

Rusted utensils can be cleaned of rust by applying either turpentine or kerosene oil and letting them sit overnight, after which the excess can be wiped off. Clean them afterward with fine emery cloth.

Plaster of paris is valuable for many purposes in a machine shop, but the disadvantage in handling it is, that it sets so quickly, and its use is, therefore, very much limited. To prevent quick setting mix a small amount of arrow root powder withp. 151 the plaster before it is mixed, and this will keep it soft for some time, and also increase its hardness when it sets.

Plaster of Paris is useful for many tasks in a machine shop, but the downside is that it sets quickly, which limits its applications. To slow down the setting time, mix a small amount of arrowroot powder withp. 151 the plaster before mixing, as this will help keep it workable for a longer time and also enhance its hardness once it sets.

For measuring purposes a tablespoon holds 1/2 ounce; a dessertspoon 1/4 ounce; a teaspoon 1/8 ounce; a teacupful of sugar weighs 1/2 pound; two teacupsful of butter weigh 1 pound; 1 1/3 pints of powdered sugar weigh 1 pound; one pint of distilled water weighs 1 pound.

For measuring, a tablespoon holds 1/2 ounce; a dessert spoon 1/4 ounce; a teaspoon 1/8 ounce; a teacup of sugar weighs Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. pound; two teacups of butter weigh 1 pound; 1 1/3 pints of powdered sugar weigh 1 pound; one pint of distilled water weighs 1 pound.

Ordinarily, 450 drops of liquid are equal to 1 ounce; this varies with different liquids, some being thicker in consistency than others, but for those of the consistency of water the measure given is fairly accurate

Ordinarily, 450 drops of liquid equal 1 ounce; this can vary with different liquids, as some are thicker than others, but for liquids similar to water, the measurement provided is pretty accurate.


CHAPTER XIVToC

THE SIMPLICITY OF GREAT INVENTIONS, AND OF
NATURE'S MANIFESTATIONS

If there is anything in the realm of mechanics which excites the wonder and admiration of man, it is the knowledge that the greatest inventions are the simplest, and that the inventor must take advantage of one law in nature which is universal in its application, and that is vibration.

If there's anything in the field of mechanics that amazes and fascinates people, it's the understanding that the greatest inventions are often the simplest. The inventor has to leverage one law of nature that applies everywhere, and that law is vibration.

There is a key to every secret in nature's great storehouse. It is not a complicated one, containing a multiplicity of wards and peculiar angles and recesses. It is the very simplicity in most of the problems which long served as a bar to discovery in many of the arts. So extremely simple have been some of the keys that many inventions resulted from accidents.

There’s a key to every secret in nature’s vast storehouse. It isn’t complicated, filled with multiple locks and odd angles and spaces. The simplicity of most problems has often been a barrier to discovery in many fields. Some of the keys have been so incredibly simple that many inventions came about by accident.

Invention Precedes Science.—Occasionally inventions were brought about by persistency and energy, and ofttimes by theorizing; but science rarely ever aids invention. The latter usually precedes science. Thus, reasoning could not show how it might be possible for steam to force water into a boiler against its own pressure. But the injector does this

Invention Comes Before Science.—Sometimes inventions come from determination and effort, and often from theorizing; but science rarely helps with invention. In fact, invention usually comes before science. For example, reasoning can’t explain how steam can push water into a boiler against its own pressure. But the injector accomplishes this.

p. 153

If, prior to 1876, it had been suggested that a sonorous vibration could be converted into an electrical pulsation, and transformed back again to a sonorous vibration, science would have proclaimed it impossible; but the telephone does it. Invention shows how things are done, and science afterwards explains the phenomena and formulates theories and laws which become serviceable to others in the arts.

If, before 1876, anyone had suggested that a sound vibration could be changed into an electrical pulse and then turned back into a sound vibration, science would have said it was impossible; but the telephone does just that. Invention demonstrates how things work, and then science comes in to explain the phenomena and develop theories and laws that can be useful to others in various fields.

Simplicity in Inventions.—But let us see how exceedingly simple are some of the great discoveries of man.

Simplicity in Designs.—But let’s take a look at just how incredibly simple some of humanity's greatest discoveries are.

The Telegraph.—The telegraph is nothing but a magnet at each end of a wire, with a lever for an armature, which opens and closes the circuit that passes through the magnets and armature, so that an impulse on the lever, or armature, at one end, by making and breaking the circuit, also makes and breaks the circuit at the other end.

The Telegraph.—The telegraph is just a magnet at each end of a wire, with a lever for an armature that opens and closes the circuit running through the magnets and armature. So, when you push or pull the lever at one end, it connects and disconnects the circuit, which in turn also connects and disconnects the circuit at the other end.

Telephone.—The telephone has merely a disk close to but not touching the end of a magnet. The sonorous vibration of the voice oscillates the diaphragm, and as the diaphragm is in the magnetic field of the magnet, it varies the pressure, so called, causing the diaphragm at the other end of the wire to vibrate in unison and give out the same sound originally imparted to the other diaphragm.

Phone.—The telephone has a disk that is close to, but not touching, the end of a magnet. The sound waves from your voice make the diaphragm vibrate, and since this diaphragm is in the magnetic field of the magnet, it changes the pressure, causing the diaphragm at the other end of the wire to vibrate in harmony and reproduce the same sound that was originally produced by the first diaphragm.

Transmitter.—The transmitter is merely a senp. 154sitized instrument. It depends solely on the principle of light contact points in an electric circuit, whereby the vibrations of the voice are augmented.

Transmitter.—The transmitter is just a sensitized instrument. It relies entirely on the principle of light contact points in an electric circuit, where the vibrations of the voice are amplified.

Phonograph.—The phonograph is not an electrical instrument. It has a diaphragm provided centrally with a blunt pin, or stylus. To make the record, some soft or plastic material, like wax, or tinfoil, is caused to move along so that the point of the stylus makes impressions in it, and the vibrations of the diaphragm cause the point to traverse a groove of greater or smaller indentations. When this groove is again presented to the stylus the diaphragm is vibrated and gives forth the sounds originally imparted to it when the indentations were made.

Record player.—The phonograph isn't an electrical device. It has a diaphragm with a blunt pin, or stylus, in the center. To create the record, a soft or plastic material like wax or tinfoil is moved so that the stylus creates impressions in it, and the vibrations of the diaphragm make the stylus move along a groove with varying indentations. When this groove is placed back in front of the stylus, the diaphragm vibrates and produces the sounds that were originally recorded when the indentations were made.

Wireless Telegraphy.—Wireless telegraphy depends for its action on what is called induction. Through this property a current is made of a high electro-motive force, which means of a high voltage, and this disturbs the ether with such intensity that the waves are sent out in all directions to immense distances.

Wireless Communication.—Wireless telegraphy works based on something known as induction. This property generates a current with high electro-motive force, which means it has a high voltage, and this creates disturbances in the ether with such intensity that waves are emitted in all directions over vast distances.

The great discovery has been to find a mechanism sensitive enough to detect the induction waves. The instrument for this purpose is called a coherer, in which small particles cohere through the action of the electric waves, and are caused to fall apart mechanically, during the electrical impulses

The big discovery has been finding a mechanism that’s sensitive enough to detect induction waves. The tool for this is called a coherer, where small particles stick together due to the action of electric waves, but fall apart mechanically during the electrical impulses.

p. 155

Printing Telegraph.—The printing telegraph requires the synchronous turning of two wheels. This means that two wheels at opposite ends of a wire must be made to turn at exactly the same rate of speed. Originally, this was tried by clock work, but without success commercially, for the reason that a pendulum does not beat with the same speed at the equator, as at different latitudes, nor at altitudes; and temperature also affects the rate. The solution was found by making the two wheels move by means of a timing fork, which vibrates with the same speed everywhere, and under all conditions.

Print Telegraph.—The printing telegraph needs two wheels to turn in sync. This means that the wheels at opposite ends of a wire must rotate at exactly the same speed. Initially, this was attempted using clockwork, but it wasn't commercially successful because a pendulum doesn't swing at the same pace at the equator as it does at different latitudes or altitudes, and temperature also influences the speed. The solution was found by using a tuning fork to make the two wheels turn, as it vibrates at a consistent speed no matter the location or conditions.

Electric Motor.—The direct current electric motor depends for its action on the principle that likes repel, and unlikes attract. The commutator so arranges the poles that at the proper points, in the revolution of the armature, the poles are always presented to each other in such a way that as they approach each other, they are opposites, and thus attract, and as they recede from each other they repel. A dynamo is exactly the same, except that the commutator reverses the operation and makes the poles alike as they approach each other, and unlike as they recede.

Electric Motor.—The direct current electric motor operates on the principle that like charges repel and unlike charges attract. The commutator positions the poles so that at the right moments in the armature's rotation, the poles face each other in a way that as they get closer, they are opposites and attract, and as they move apart, they are alike and repel. A dynamo works in much the same way, but the commutator changes the operation so that the poles are alike as they come together and unlike as they move apart.

Steel is simply iron, to which has been added a small per cent of carbon.

Steel is just iron with a small percentage of carbon added.

Quinine is efficient in its natural state, but it hasp. 156 been made infinitely more effectual by the breaking up or changing of the molecules with acids. Sulphate of quinine is made by the use of sulphuric acid as a solvent.

Quinine works well in its natural form, but it hasp. 156 become much more effective by altering or breaking down the molecules with acids. Sulphate of quinine is created using sulfuric acid as a solvent.

Explosions.—Explosions depend on oxygen. While this element does not burn, a certain amount of it must be present to support combustion. Thus, the most inflammable gas or liquid will not burn or explode unless oxygenized. Explosives are made by using a sufficient amount, in a concentrated form, which is added to the fuel, so that when it is ignited there is a sufficient amount of oxygen present to support combustion, hence the rapid explosion which follows.

Explosions.—Explosions rely on oxygen. While oxygen itself doesn't burn, it needs to be present in a certain amount to support combustion. Therefore, even the most flammable gas or liquid won't burn or explode unless there's enough oxygen. Explosives are created by combining a sufficient amount of oxygen, in a concentrated form, with the fuel so that when ignited, there's enough oxygen available to sustain combustion, resulting in a rapid explosion.

Vibration in Nature.—The physical meaning of vibration is best illustrated by the movement of a pendulum. All agitation is vibration. All force manifests itself in this way.

Vibrations in Nature.—The concept of vibration is most effectively shown through the movement of a pendulum. Every disturbance is a form of vibration. Every force expresses itself in this manner.

The painful brilliancy of the sun is produced by the rapid vibrations of the rays; the twinkle of the distant star, the waves of the ocean when ruffled by the winds; the shimmer of the moon on its crested surface; the brain in thinking; the mouth in talking; the beating of the heart; all, alike, obey the one grand and universal law of vibratory motion.

The intense brightness of the sun comes from the fast vibrations of its rays; the flicker of a distant star, the waves of the ocean when stirred by the wind; the glow of the moon on its wavy surface; the mind while thinking; the mouth while speaking; the heartbeat; all follow the same great and universal principle of vibratory motion.

Qualities of Sound.—Sound is nothing but a succession of vibrations of greater or less magnitude. Pitch is produced by the number of vibrap. 157tions; intensity by their force; and quality by the character of the article vibrated.

Sound Qualities.—Sound is simply a series of vibrations that vary in strength. Pitch comes from the number of vibrations; intensity is determined by their power; and quality is defined by the type of material that's vibrating.

Since the great telephone controversy which took place some years ago there has been a wonderful development in the knowledge of acoustics, or sounds. It was shown that the slightest sound would immediately set into vibration every article of furniture in a room, and very sensitive instruments have been devised to register the force and quality.

Since the big telephone debate that happened some years ago, there has been an incredible growth in our understanding of acoustics, or sound. It was demonstrated that even the faintest sound can cause every piece of furniture in a room to vibrate, and extremely sensitive instruments have been created to measure the intensity and quality of these sounds.

The Photographer's Plate.—It is known that the chemical action of an object on a photographer's plate is due to vibration; each represents a force of different intensity, hence the varying shades produced. Owing to the different rates of vibrations caused by the different colors, the difficulty has been to photograph them, but this has now been accomplished. Harmony, or "being in tune," as is the common expression, is as necessary in light, as in music.

The Photographer's Plate.—It's recognized that the chemical reaction of an object on a photographer's plate comes from vibration; each represents a force of varying strength, which creates different shades. Because different colors produce different rates of vibrations, capturing their images has been challenging, but this has now been achieved. Harmony, or "being in tune," as people usually say, is just as important in light as it is in music.

Some chemicals will bring out or "develop," the pictures; others will not. Colors are now photographed because invention and science have found the harmonizing chemicals.

Some chemicals will develop the pictures; others won't. Colors are now captured because invention and science have discovered the right chemicals.

Quadruplex Telegraphy.—One of the most remarkable of all the wonders of our age is what is known as duplex and quadruplex telegraphy. Every atom and impulse in electricity is oscillation.p. 158 The current which transmits a telegram is designated in the science as "vibratory."

Quadruplex Telecommunication.—One of the most amazing innovations of our time is what’s called duplex and quadruplex telegraphy. Every part and movement in electricity is oscillation.p. 158 The current that sends a telegram is referred to in scientific terms as "vibratory."

But how is it possible to transmit two or more messages over one wire at the same time? It is by bringing into play the harmony of sounds. One message is sent in one direction in the key of A; another message in the other direction in B; and so any number may be sent, because the electrical vibrations may be tuned, just like the strings of a violin.

But how is it possible to send two or more messages over one wire at the same time? It's done by using sound harmonies. One message is sent in one direction in the key of A; another message goes the opposite way in B; and you can send as many as you want because the electrical vibrations can be adjusted, just like the strings of a violin.

Electric Harmony.—Every sound produces a corresponding vibration in surrounding objects. While each vibrates, or is capable of transmitting a sound given to it by its vibratory powers, it may not vibrate in harmony.

Electric Harmony.—Every sound creates a matching vibration in the objects around it. While each object vibrates or can carry a sound because of its vibratory abilities, it might not vibrate in harmony.

When a certain key of a piano is struck every key has a certain vibration, and if we could separate it from the other sounds, it would reflect the same sound as the string struck, just the same as the walls of a room or the air itself would convey that sound.

When a piano key is pressed, it creates a specific vibration, and if we could isolate it from the other sounds, it would resonate just like the string that was struck, just as the walls of a room or the air itself would carry that sound.

But as no two strings in the instrument vibrate the same number of times each second, the rapid movement of successive sounds of the keys do not interfere with each other. If, however, there are several pianos in a room, and all are tuned the same pitch, the striking of a key on one instrument willp. 159 instantly set in vibration the corresponding strings in all the other instruments.

But since no two strings on the instrument vibrate at the same frequency each second, the quick succession of sounds from the keys doesn't clash with each other. However, if there are multiple pianos in a room, all tuned to the same pitch, striking a key on one piano willp. 159 immediately cause the corresponding strings on all the other pianos to vibrate.

This is one reason why a piano tested in a music wareroom has always a more beautiful and richer sound than when in a drawing-room or hall, since each string is vibrated by the other instrument.

This is one reason why a piano tested in a music showroom always has a more beautiful and richer sound than when it's in a living room or hall, since each string vibrates with the other instrument.

If a small piece of paper is balanced upon the strings of a violin, every key of the piano may be struck, except the one in tune, without affecting the paper; but the moment the same key is struck the vibration of the harmonizing pitch will unbalance the paper.

If a small piece of paper is balanced on the strings of a violin, you can hit every key on the piano without disturbing the paper, except for the one that's in tune. But the instant you hit that key, the vibration of the matching pitch will send the paper off balance.

The musical sound of C produces 528 vibrations per second; D 616, and so on. The octave above has double the number of vibrations of the lower note. It will thus be understood why discord in music is not pleasant to the ear, as the vibrations are not in the proper multiples.

The musical note C produces 528 vibrations per second; D produces 616, and so on. The octave above has double the number of vibrations of the lower note. This explains why discord in music isn't pleasant to hear, as the vibrations aren't in the right multiples.

Odors.—So with odors. The sense of smell is merely the force set in motion by the vibration of the elements. An instrument called the odophone demonstrates that a scale or gamut exists in flowers; that sharp smells indicate high tones and heavy smells low tones. Over fifty odors have thus been analyzed.

Smells.—So it is with odors. The sense of smell is simply the result of vibrations from different elements. An instrument called the odophone shows that there is a scale or range in flowers; sharp smells correspond to high notes, while heavy smells relate to low notes. More than fifty odors have been analyzed this way.

The treble clef, note E, 4th space, is orange; note D, 1st space below, violet; note F, 4th space above clef, ambergris. To make a proper bouquet, therep. 160fore the different odors must be harmonized, just the same as the notes of a musical chord are selected.

The treble clef, note E, 4th space, is orange; note D, 1st space below, is violet; note F, 4th space above clef, is ambergris. To create a proper bouquet, the different scents must be harmonized, just like the notes in a musical chord are chosen.

A Bouquet of Vibrations.—The odophone shows that santal, geranium, orange flower and camphor, make a bouquet in the key of C. It is easy to conceive that a beautiful bouquet means nothing more than an agreeable vibratory sensation of the olfactory nerves.

A Bundle of Vibrations.—The odophone demonstrates that sandalwood, geranium, orange blossom, and camphor create a bouquet in the key of C. It's easy to understand that a beautiful bouquet is simply a pleasant vibratory sensation for the olfactory nerves.

Taste.—So with the sense of taste. The tongue is covered with minute cells surrounded by nervous filaments which are set in motion whenever any substance is brought into contact with the surface. Tasting is merely the movement of these filaments, of greater or less rapidity.

Flavor.—So it is with the sense of taste. The tongue is covered with tiny cells surrounded by nerve fibers that get activated whenever something touches its surface. Tasting is simply the movement of these fibers, which can happen at different speeds.

If an article is tasteless, it means that these filaments do not vibrate. These vibrations are of two kinds. They may move faster or slower, or they may move in a peculiar way. A sharp acute taste means that the vibrations are very rapid; a mild taste, slow vibrations.

If something tastes bland, it means these filaments aren't vibrating. There are two types of vibrations. They can move faster or slower, or they can move in a unique way. A sharp, intense taste means the vibrations are very quick; a mild taste means the vibrations are slow.

When a pleasant taste is detected, it is only because the filaments are set into an agreeable motion. The vibrations in the tongue may become so rapid that it will be painful, just as a shriek becomes piercing to the ear, or an intense light dazzling to the eye; all proceed from the same physical force acting on the brain

When a nice taste is noticed, it's only because the tiny fibers are moving in a way that's pleasing. The vibrations in the tongue can speed up so much that it becomes painful, just like a scream can be piercing to the ear or a bright light can be blinding to the eye; they all come from the same physical force affecting the brain.

p. 161

Color.—Color, that seemingly unexplainable force, becomes a simple thing when the principles of vibration are applied, and this has been fully explained by the spectroscope and its operation.

Color.—Color, that apparently mysterious force, becomes straightforward when we apply the principles of vibration, and this has been thoroughly explained by the spectroscope and how it works.

When the boy once appreciates that this force, or this motion in nature is just as simple as the great inventions which have grown out of this manifestation, he will understand that a knowledge of these things will enable him to utilize the energy in a proper way

When the boy realizes that this force, or this natural movement, is just as straightforward as the great inventions that have emerged from it, he will understand that knowing about these things will help him use the energy effectively.


CHAPTER XVToC

WORKSHOP RECIPES AND FORMULAS

In a work of this kind, dealing with the various elements, the boy should have at hand recipes or formulas for everything which comes within the province of his experiments. The following are most carefully selected, the objects being to present those which are the more easily compounded.

In a project like this, where various elements are involved, the boy should have recipes or formulas for everything related to his experiments. The following are carefully chosen, focusing on those that are easier to mix.

Adhesives for Various Uses.—Waterproof glue. Use a good quality of glue, and dissolve it in warm water, then add one pound of linseed oil to eight pounds of the glue. Add three ounces of nitric acid.

Adhesives for Different Applications.—Waterproof glue. Use a high-quality glue, dissolve it in warm water, and then mix in one pound of linseed oil for every eight pounds of glue. Add three ounces of nitric acid.

Leather or Card-board Glue. After dissolving good glue in water, to which a little turpentine has been added, mix it with a thick paste of starch, the proportion of starch to glue being about two to every part of glue used. The mixture is used cold.

Leather or Cardboard Glue. After dissolving quality glue in water with a bit of turpentine added, mix it with a thick paste of starch, using about two parts starch for each part of glue used. The mixture is applied cold.

A fine Belt Glue. Dissolve 50 ounces of gelatine in water, and heat after pouring off the excess water. Then stir in five ounces of glycerine, ten ounces of turpentine, and five ounces of linseed oil varnish. If too thick add water to suit.

A great belt glue. Dissolve 50 ounces of gelatin in water and heat it after pouring off the extra water. Then mix in five ounces of glycerin, ten ounces of turpentine, and five ounces of linseed oil varnish. If it’s too thick, add water as needed.

For cementing Iron to Marble. Use 30 parts of Plaster of Paris, 10 parts of iron filings, and onep. 163 half part of sal ammoniac. These are mixed up with vinegar to make a fluid paste.

For bonding iron to marble, use 30 parts of Plaster of Paris, 10 parts of iron filings, and 1.5 parts of sal ammoniac. Mix these with vinegar to create a fluid paste.

To cement Glass to Iron. Use 3 ounces of boiled linseed oil and 1 part of copal varnish, and into this put 2 ounces of litharge and 1 ounce of white lead and thoroughly mingle so as to make a smooth paste.

To glue glass to iron, mix 3 ounces of boiled linseed oil with 1 part copal varnish. Then add 2 ounces of litharge and 1 ounce of white lead, and blend everything together to create a smooth paste.

Water-proof Cement. Boiled linseed oil, 6 ounces; copal, 6 ounces; litharge, 2 ounces; and white lead, 16 ounces. To be thoroughly incorporated.

Waterproof Cement. Boiled linseed oil, 6 ounces; copal, 6 ounces; litharge, 2 ounces; and white lead, 16 ounces. Mix thoroughly.

To unite rubber or leather to hard substances. One ounce of pulverized gum shellac dissolved in 9 1/2 ounces of strong ammonia, will make an elastic cement. Must be kept tightly corked.

To bond rubber or leather to hard materials, mix one ounce of powdered gum shellac dissolved in 9 1/2 ounces of strong ammonia to create an elastic adhesive. Keep it sealed tightly.

For uniting iron to iron. Use equal parts of boiled oil, white lead, pipe clay and black oxide of manganese, and form it into a paste.

For joining iron to iron, mix equal parts of boiled oil, white lead, pipe clay, and black oxide of manganese to create a paste.

Transparent Cement. Unite 1 ounce of india rubber, 67 ounces of chloroform, and 40 ounces of mastic. This is to be kept together for a week, and stirred at times, when it will be ready for use.

Transparent Cement. Combine 1 ounce of India rubber, 67 ounces of chloroform, and 40 ounces of mastic. This mixture should be kept together for a week and stirred occasionally, after which it will be ready to use.

To Attach Cloth to Metal. Water 100 parts, sugar 10 parts, starch 20 parts, and zinc chloride 1 part. This must be first stirred and made free of lumps, and then heated until it thickens.

To Attach Cloth to Metal. Water 100 parts, sugar 10 parts, starch 20 parts, and zinc chloride 1 part. First, stir this mixture until it’s free of lumps, then heat it until it thickens.

United States Government Gum. Dissolve 1 part of gum arabic in water and add 4 parts of sugarp. 164 and 1 part of starch. This is then boiled for a few minutes, and thinned down as required.

United States Government Gum. Dissolve 1 part of gum arabic in water and add 4 parts of sugarp. 164 and 1 part of starch. Then, boil this mixture for a few minutes and adjust the thickness as needed.

To Make Different Alloys.—Silver-aluminum. Silver one-fourth part, and aluminum three-fourth parts.

To Create Alloys—Silver-aluminum. One part silver and three parts aluminum.

Bell-metal. Copper, 80 parts; tin, 20 parts. Or, copper, 72 parts; tin, 26 parts; zinc, 2 parts. Or, copper 2; 1 of tin.

Bell-metal. Copper, 80 parts; tin, 20 parts. Or, copper, 72 parts; tin, 26 parts; zinc, 2 parts. Or, copper 2; 1 of tin.

Brass. Copper, 66 parts; zinc, 32 parts; tin, 1 part; lead, 1 part.

Brass: Copper, 66 parts; zinc, 32 parts; tin, 1 part; lead, 1 part.

Bronzes. Copper, 65 parts; zinc, 30 parts; tin, 5 parts. Or, copper, 85 parts; zinc, 10 parts; tin, 3 parts; lead, 2 parts.

Bronzes. Copper, 65 parts; zinc, 30 parts; tin, 5 parts. Or, copper, 85 parts; zinc, 10 parts; tin, 3 parts; lead, 2 parts.

German Silver. 52 parts of copper; 26 parts zinc; 22 parts nickel.

German Silver: 52 parts copper, 26 parts zinc, 22 parts nickel.

For Coating Mirrors. Tin, 70 parts; mercury, 30 parts.

For Coating Mirrors: Tin, 70 parts; Mercury, 30 parts.

Boiler Compounds.—To prevent scaling. Use common washing soda, or Glauber salts.

Boiler Chemicals.—To stop scaling. Use regular washing soda or Glauber salts.

To Dissolve Celluloid.—Use 50 parts of alcohol and 5 parts of camphor for every 5 parts of celluloid. When the celluloid is put into the solution it will dissolve it.

To dissolve celluloid.—Mix 50 parts of alcohol with 5 parts of camphor for every 5 parts of celluloid. When you add the celluloid to the solution, it will dissolve.

To Soften Celluloid. This may be done by simply heating, so it will bend, and by putting it in steam, it can be worked like dough.

To Soften Celluloid. This can be done by just heating it so it will bend, and by placing it in steam, it can be shaped like dough.

Clay Mixture for Forges.—Mix dry 20 parts of fire clay, 20 parts cast-iron turnings, one partp. 165 of common salt, and 1/2 part sal ammoniac, and then add water while stirring, so as to form a mortar of the proper consistency. The mixture will become very hard when heat is applied.

Forge Clay Mixture.—Combine 20 parts dry fire clay, 20 parts cast-iron shavings, one partp. 165 of table salt, and 1/2 part sal ammoniac. Gradually add water while mixing until you achieve a mortar with the right consistency. The mixture will harden significantly when heated.

A Modeling Clay. This is made by mixing the clay with glycerine and afterwards adding vaseline. If too much vaseline is added it becomes too soft.

A Modeling Clay. This is made by mixing clay with glycerin and then adding petroleum jelly. If too much petroleum jelly is added, it becomes too soft.

Fluids for Cleaning Clothes, Furniture, Etc.—For Delicate Fabrics. Make strong decoction of soap bark, and put into alcohol.

Cleaners for Clothes, Furniture, Etc.—For Delicate Fabrics. Make a strong brew of soap bark and mix it with alcohol.

Non-inflammable Cleaner. Equal parts of acetone, ammonia and diluted alcohol.

Non-flammable Cleaner. Equal parts of acetone, ammonia, and diluted alcohol.

Taking dried paint from clothing. Shake up 2 parts of ammonia water with 1 part of spirits of turpentine.

Taking dried paint out of clothing: Mix 2 parts ammonia water with 1 part turpentine.

Cleaning Furniture, etc. Unite 2.4 parts of wax; 9.4 parts of oil of turpentine; 42 parts acetic acid; 42 parts citric acid; 42 parts white soap. This must be well mingled before using.

Cleaning Furniture, etc. Combine 2.4 parts of wax, 9.4 parts of turpentine oil, 42 parts of acetic acid, 42 parts of citric acid, and 42 parts of white soap. Mix this well before using.

Removing Rust from Iron or Steel. Rub the surface with oil of tartar. Or, apply turpentine or kerosene, and after allowing to stand over night, clean with emery cloth.

Removing Rust from Iron or Steel. Rub the surface with cream of tartar. Or, apply turpentine or kerosene, and after letting it sit overnight, clean it with emery cloth.

For Removing Ink Stains from Silver. Use a paste made of chloride of lime and water.

For Removing Ink Stains from Silver: Create a paste using chlorine bleach and water.

To clean Silver-Plated Ware. Make a mixture of cream of tartar, 2 parts; levigated chalk, 2p. 166 parts; and alum, 1 part. Grind up the alum and mix thoroughly.

To clean silver-plated items, make a mixture of 2 parts cream of tartar, 2 parts powdered chalk, and 1 part alum. Grind the alum and mix everything together thoroughly.

Cleaning a Gas Stove. Make a solution of 9 parts of caustic soda and 150 parts of water, and put the separate parts of the stove in the solution for an hour or two. The parts will come out looking like new.

Cleaning a Gas Stove. Create a solution of 9 parts caustic soda and 150 parts water, and soak the separate parts of the stove in the solution for one or two hours. The parts will come out looking brand new.

Cleaning Aluminum. A few drops of sulphuric acid in water will restore the luster to aluminum ware.

Cleaning Aluminum. A few drops of sulfuric acid in water will bring back the shine to aluminum cookware.

Oil Eradicator. Soap spirits, 100 parts; ammonia solution, 25; acetic ether, 15 parts.

Oil Eradicator. Soap spirits, 100 parts; ammonia solution, 25; acetic ether, 15 parts.

Disinfectants.—Camphor, 1 ounce; carbolic acid (75 per cent.), 12 ounces; aqua ammonia, 10 drachms; soft salt water, 8 drachms.

Disinfectants.—Camphor, 1 ounce; carbolic acid (75 percent), 12 ounces; ammonia water, 10 drachms; saline solution, 8 drachms.

Water-Closet Deodorant. Ferric chloride, 4 parts; zinc chloride, 5 parts; aluminum chloride, 4 parts; calcium chloride, 5 parts; magnesium chloride, 3 parts; and water sufficient to make 90 parts. When all is dissolved add to each gallon 10 grains of thymol and a quarter-ounce of rosemary that had been previously dissolved in six quarts of alcohol.

Water-Closet Deodorant. Ferric chloride, 4 parts; zinc chloride, 5 parts; aluminum chloride, 4 parts; calcium chloride, 5 parts; magnesium chloride, 3 parts; and enough water to make 90 parts. Once everything is dissolved, add 10 grains of thymol and a quarter-ounce of rosemary that has been previously dissolved in six quarts of alcohol to each gallon.

Odorless Disinfectants. Mercuric chloride, 1 part; cupric sulphate, 10 parts; zinc sulphate, 50 parts; sodium chloride, 65 parts; water to make 1,000 parts.

Odorless Disinfectants. Mercuric chloride, 1 part; cupric sulfate, 10 parts; zinc sulfate, 50 parts; sodium chloride, 65 parts; water to make 1,000 parts.

Emery for Lapping Purposes. Fill a pint bottlep. 167 with machine oil and emery flour, in the proportion of 7 parts oil and 1 part emery. Allow it to stand for twenty minutes, after shaking up well, then pour off half the contents, without disturbing the settlings, and the part so poured off contains only the finest of the emery particles, and is the only part which should be used on the lapping roller.

Emery for Lapping Purposes. Fill a pint bottlep. 167 with machine oil and emery flour in a ratio of 7 parts oil to 1 part emery. Let it sit for twenty minutes after shaking it well, then pour off half the contents without disturbing the settled particles. The liquid you pour off contains only the finest emery particles, which is the only part that should be used on the lapping roller.

Explosives.—Common Gunpowder. Potassium nitrate, 75 parts; charcoal, 15 parts; sulphur, 10 parts.

Explosives.—Common Gunpowder. Potassium nitrate, 75 parts; charcoal, 15 parts; sulfur, 10 parts.

Dynamite. 75 per cent. nitro-glycerine; 25 per cent. infusorial earth.

Dynamite. 75% nitroglycerin; 25% diatomaceous earth.

Giant Powder. 36 per cent. nitro-glycerine; 48 per cent. nitrate of potash; 8 per cent. of sulphur; 8 per cent. charcoal.

Giant Powder: 36% nitroglycerin; 48% potassium nitrate; 8% sulfur; 8% charcoal.

Fulminate. Chlorate of potassia, 6 parts; pure lampblack, 4 parts; sulphur, 1 part. A blow will cause it to explode.

Fulminate. Potassium chlorate, 6 parts; pure lampblack, 4 parts; sulfur, 1 part. A hit will make it explode.

Files.—How to Keep Clean. Olive oil is the proper substance to rub over files, as this will prevent the creases from filling up while in use, and preserve the file for a longer time, and also enable it to do better cutting.

Documents.—How to Keep Clean. Olive oil is the right substance to apply to files, as it will stop the grooves from clogging up while in use, extend the file's lifespan, and also allow it to cut more effectively.

To Renew Old Files. Use a potash bath for boiling them in, and afterwards brush them well so as to get the creases clean. Then stretch a cotton cloth between two supports, and after plunging thep. 168 file into nitric acid, use the stretched cloth to wipe off the acid. The object is to remove the acid from the ridges of the file, so the acid will only eat out or etch the deep portions between the ridges, and not affect the edges or teeth.

To Renew Old Files. Use a potash bath to boil them, and then brush them well to clean the creases. Next, stretch a cotton cloth between two supports, and after dipping thep. 168 file in nitric acid, use the stretched cloth to wipe off the acid. The goal is to remove the acid from the ridges of the file so that it only etches the deep parts between the ridges, without affecting the edges or teeth.

Fire Proof Materials or Substances.—For Wood. For the kind where it is desired to apply with a brush, use 100 parts sodium silicate; 50 parts of Spanish white, and 100 parts of glue. It must be applied hot.

Fire-Resistant Materials or Substances.—For Wood. For the type that you want to apply with a brush, use 100 parts sodium silicate, 50 parts Spanish white, and 100 parts glue. It needs to be applied while hot.

Another good preparation is made as follows: Sodium silicate, 350 parts; asbestos, powdered, 350 parts; and boiling water 1,000 parts.

Another good preparation is made like this: 350 parts sodium silicate, 350 parts powdered asbestos, and 1,000 parts boiling water.

For Coating Steel, etc. Silica, 50 parts; plastic fire clay, 10 parts; ball clay, 3 parts. To be thoroughly mixed.

For coating steel, etc.: silica, 50 parts; plastic fire clay, 10 parts; ball clay, 3 parts. Mix thoroughly.

For Paper. Ammonium sulphate, 8 parts; boracic acid, 3 parts; borax, 2 parts; water, 100 parts. This is applied in a liquid state to the paper surface.

For Paper. Ammonium sulfate, 8 parts; boric acid, 3 parts; borax, 2 parts; water, 100 parts. This is applied in a liquid form to the paper surface.

Floor Dressings.—Oil Stain. Neats' foot oil, 1 part; cottonseed oil, 1 part; petroleum oil, 1 part. This may be colored with anything desired, like burnt sienna, annatto, or other coloring material.

Flooring Options.—Oil Stain. Neatsfoot oil, 1 part; cottonseed oil, 1 part; petroleum oil, 1 part. You can color this with any desired pigment, such as burnt sienna, annatto, or other coloring materials.

Ballroom Powder. Hard paraffine, 1 pound; powdered boric acid, 7 pounds; oil of lavender, 1 drachm; oil of neroli, 20 minims.

Ballroom Powder. Hard paraffin, 1 pound; powdered boric acid, 7 pounds; lavender oil, 1 drachm; neroli oil, 20 minims.

Foot Powders.—For Perspiring Feet. Balsamp. 169 Peru, 15 minims; formic acid, 1 drachm; chloral hydrate, 1 drachm; alcohol to make 3 ounces.

Foot powder.—For Sweaty Feet. Balsamp. 169 Peru, 15 drops; formic acid, 1 ounce; chloral hydrate, 1 ounce; alcohol to make 3 ounces.

For Easing Feet. Tannaform, 1 drachm; talcum, 2 drachms; lycopodium, 30 grains.

For Easing Feet. Tannaform, 1 gram; talcum powder, 2 grams; lycopodium, 30 grains.

Frost Bites. Carbolized water, 4 drachms; nitric acid, 1 drop; oil of geranium, 1 drop.

Frost Bites. Carbonated water, 4 ounces; nitric acid, 1 drop; geranium oil, 1 drop.

Glass.—To cut glass, hold it under water, and use a pair of shears.

Glass.—To cut glass, hold it underwater and use a pair of scissors.

To make a hole through glass, place a circle of moist earth on the glass, and form a hole in this the diameter wanted for the hole, and in this hole pour molten lead, and the part touched by the lead will fall out.

To make a hole in glass, put a circle of damp earth on the glass, create a hole in it with the desired diameter, and pour molten lead into this hole. The area that comes into contact with the lead will break away.

To Frost Glass. Cover it with a mixture of 6 ounces of magnesium sulphate, 2 ounces of dextrine, and 20 ounces of water. This produces a fine effect.

To frost glass, cover it with a mixture of 6 ounces of magnesium sulfate, 2 ounces of dextrin, and 20 ounces of water. This creates a nice effect.

To imitate ground glass, use a composition of sandarac, 2 1/2 ounces; mastic, 1/2 ounce; ether, 24 ounces; and benzine, 16 ounces.

To replicate ground glass, mix together 2 1/2 ounces of sandarac, 1/2 ounce of mastic, 24 ounces of ether, and 16 ounces of benzene.

Iron and Steel.—How to distinguish them. Wash the metal and put it into a solution of bichromate of potash to which has been added a small amount of sulphuric acid. In a minute or so take out the metal, wash and wipe it. Soft steel and cast iron will have the appearance of an ash-gray tint; tempered steels will be black; and pudp. 170dled or refined irons will be nearly white and have a metallic reflection.

Iron and Steel.—How to tell them apart. Wash the metal and place it in a solution of potassium bichromate mixed with a little sulfuric acid. After about a minute, take the metal out, wash it, and wipe it down. Soft steel and cast iron will look ash-gray; tempered steels will appear black; and puddled or refined irons will be nearly white and have a metallic shine.

To Harden Iron or Steel. If wrought iron, put in the charge 20 parts, by weight, of common salt, 2 parts of potassium cyanide, .3 part of potassium bichromate, .15 part of broken glass.

To Harden Iron or Steel. If using wrought iron, add 20 parts by weight of common salt, 2 parts of potassium cyanide, 0.3 part of potassium bichromate, and 0.15 part of broken glass.

To harden cast iron, there should be added to the charge the following: To 60 parts of water, add 2 1/2 parts of vinegar, 3 parts of common salt, and .25 part of hydrochloric acid.

To harden cast iron, add the following to the mixture: For every 60 parts of water, include 2 1/2 parts of vinegar, 3 parts of table salt, and 0.25 part of hydrochloric acid.

To soften castings: Heat them to a high temperature and cover them with fine coal dust and allow to cool gradually.

To soften castings: Heat them to a high temperature, cover them with fine coal dust, and let them cool slowly.

Lacquers.—For Aluminum. Dissolve 100 parts of gum lac in 300 parts of ammonia and heat for an hour moderately in a water bath. The aluminum must be well cleaned before applying. Heat the aluminum plate afterwards.

Nail polish.—For Aluminum. Dissolve 100 parts of gum lac in 300 parts of ammonia and heat it moderately in a water bath for an hour. The aluminum needs to be thoroughly cleaned before applying. After that, heat the aluminum plate.

For Brass. Make a compound as follows; Annatto,  1/4 ounce; saffro, 1/4 ounce; turmeric, 1 ounce; seed lac, 3 ounces; and alcohol, 1 pint. Allow the mixture to stand for three days, then strain in the vessel which contains the seed lac, and allow to stand until all is dissolved.

For Brass. Make a mixture as follows: Annatto, 1/4 ounce; saffron, 1/4 ounce; turmeric, 1 ounce; seed lac, 3 ounces; and alcohol, 1 pint. Let the mixture sit for three days, then strain it into the container with the seed lac, and let it sit until everything is dissolved.

For Copper. Heat fine, thickly liquid amber varnish so it can be readily applied to the copper, and this is allowed to dry. Then heat the coated object until it commences to smoke and turn brown

For Copper. Heat a nice, thick layer of amber varnish until it's easy to apply to the copper, and let it dry. Then heat the coated object until it starts to smoke and turn brown.

p. 171

Lubricants.—Heavy machinery oils. Use paraffine, 8 pounds; palm oil, 20 pounds; and oleonaptha, 12 pounds. Dissolve the paraffine in the oleonaptha at a temperature of 160 degrees and then stir in the palm oil a little at a time.

Lubes.—Heavy machinery oils. Use paraffin, 8 pounds; palm oil, 20 pounds; and oleonaphta, 12 pounds. Melt the paraffin in the oleonaphta at a temperature of 160 degrees, then gradually mix in the palm oil a little at a time.

For Cutting Tools. Heat six gallons of water and put in three and a half pounds of soft soap and a half gallon of clean refuse oil. It should be well mixed.

For Cutting Tools. Heat six gallons of water and add three and a half pounds of soft soap and half a gallon of clean waste oil. It should be thoroughly mixed.

For high-speed bearings. Use flaky graphite and kerosene oil. Apply this as soon as there is any indication of heating in the bearings.

For high-speed bearings, use flaky graphite and kerosene oil. Apply this as soon as you notice any signs of heating in the bearings.

For lathe centers, one part of graphite and four parts of tallow thoroughly mixed and applied will be very serviceable.

For lathe centers, mixing one part graphite with four parts tallow and applying it will work really well.

For Wooden Gears. Use tallow, 30 parts; palm oil; 20 parts; fish oil, 10 parts; and graphite, 20 parts.

For Wooden Gears. Use 30 parts tallow, 20 parts palm oil, 10 parts fish oil, and 20 parts graphite.

Paper.—Fire Proof Paper.—Make the following solution: Ammonium sulphate, 8 parts; boracic acid, 3 parts; water, 100 parts. Mix at a temperature of 120 degrees. Paper coated with this will resist heat.

Document.—Fireproof Paper.—Create the following solution: Ammonium sulfate, 8 parts; boric acid, 3 parts; water, 100 parts. Mix at a temperature of 120 degrees. Paper coated with this will withstand heat.

Filter Paper. Dip the paper into nitric acid of 1.433 specific gravity, and subsequently wash and dry it. This makes a fine filtering body.

Filter Paper. Dip the paper into nitric acid with a specific gravity of 1.433, and then wash and dry it. This creates an excellent filtering medium.

Carbon Paper. A variety of substances may be used, such as fine soot or ivory black, ultramarinep. 172 or Paris blue. Mix either with fine grain soap, so it is of a uniform consistency and then apply to the paper with a stiff brush, rubbing it in until it is evenly spread over the surface.

Carbon Paper. You can use different materials, like fine soot or ivory black, ultramarinep. 172 or Paris blue. Mix any of these with fine grain soap to achieve a uniform consistency, and then apply it to the paper with a stiff brush, rubbing it in until it's evenly spread across the surface.

Tracing Paper. Take unsized paper and apply a coat of varnish made of equal parts of Canada balsam and oil of turpentine. To increase the transparency give another coat. The sheets must be well dried before using.

Tracing Paper. Take unsized paper and apply a layer of varnish made of equal parts Canada balsam and turpentine oil. To enhance transparency, apply another layer. The sheets need to be fully dried before use.

Photography.—Developers.

Photography. — Developers.

1. Pure water, 30 ounces; sulphite soda, 5 ounces; carbonate soda, 2 1/2 ounces.

1. Pure water, 30 ounces; sodium sulfite, 5 ounces; sodium carbonate, 2 1/2 ounces.

2. Pure water, 24 ounces; oxalic acid, 15 grains; pyrogallic acid, 1 ounce.

2. Pure water, 24 ounces; oxalic acid, 15 grains; pyrogallic acid, 1 ounce.

To develop use of solution 1, 1 ounce; solution 2, 1/2 ounce; and water, 3 ounces.

To develop, use 1 ounce of solution 1, 1/2 ounce of solution 2, and 3 ounces of water.

Stock solutions for developing: Make solution No. 1 as follows: water, 32 ounces; tolidol, I ounce; sodium sulphate, 1 1/2 ounces.

Stock solutions for developing: Make solution No. 1 as follows: water, 32 ounces; tolidol, 1 ounce; sodium sulfate, 1 ½ ounces.

Solution No. 2: Water, 32 ounces; sodium sulphate.

Solution No. 2: Water, 32 ounces; sodium sulfate.

Solution No. 3: Water, 32 ounces; sodium carbonate, from 4 to 6 ounces.

Solution No. 3: Water, 32 ounces; sodium carbonate, between 4 to 6 ounces.

Fixing bath. Add two ounces of S. P. C. clarifier (acid bisulphate of sodium) solution to one quart of hypo solution 1 in 5.

Fixing bath. Add two ounces of S. P. C. clarifier (sodium bisulfate) solution to one quart of hypo solution 1 in 5.

Clearing solution. Saturated solution of alum, 20 ounces; and hydrochloric acid, 1 ounce.p. 173 Varnish. Brush over the negative a solution of equal parts of benzol and Japanese gold size.

Clearing solution. Saturated solution of alum, 20 ounces; and hydrochloric acid, 1 ounce.p. 173 Varnish. Apply a solution made of equal parts benzene and Japanese gold size to the negative with a brush.

Plasters.—Court Plaster. Use good quality silk, and on this spread a solution of isinglass warmed. Dry and repeat several times, then apply several coats of balsam of Peru. Or,

Band-aids.—Court Plaster. Use high-quality silk, and coat it with a warmed solution of isinglass. Let it dry and repeat several times, then apply multiple layers of balsam of Peru. Or,

On muslin or silk properly stretched, apply a thin coating of smooth strained flour paste, and when dry several coats of colorless gelatine are added. The gelatine is applied warm, and cooled before the fabric is taken off.

On properly stretched muslin or silk, apply a thin layer of smooth strained flour paste, and once it's dry, add several coats of clear gelatin. The gelatin is applied warm and allowed to cool before the fabric is removed.

Plating.—Bronze coating. For antiques, use vinegar, 1,000 parts; by weight, powdered bloodstone, 125 parts; plumbago, 25 parts. Apply with brush.

Plating food.—Bronze coating. For antiques, use vinegar, 1,000 parts; by weight, powdered bloodstone, 125 parts; plumbago, 25 parts. Apply with a brush.

For brass where a copper surface is desired, make a rouge with a little chloride of platinum and water, and apply with a brush.

For brass where you want a copper surface, create a paste with a bit of platinum chloride and water, and apply it with a brush.

For gas fixtures. Use a bronze paint and mix with it five times its volume of spirit of turpentine, and to this mixture add dried slaked lime, about 40 grains to the pint. Agitate well and decant the clear liquid.

For gas fixtures. Use bronze paint and mix it with five times its volume of turpentine, and to this mixture add about 40 grains of dried slaked lime for each pint. Stir it well and pour off the clear liquid.

Coloring Metals.—Brilliant black for iron. Selenious acid, 6 parts; cupric sulphate, 10 parts; water 1,000 parts; nitric acid, 5 parts.

Metal Coloring.—Bright black for iron. Selenious acid, 6 parts; copper sulfate, 10 parts; water 1,000 parts; nitric acid, 5 parts.

Blue-black. Selenious acid, 10 parts; nitric acid, 5 parts; cupric sulphate; water, 1,000 parts. Thep. 174 colors will be varied dependent on the time the objects are immersed in the solution.

Blue-black. Selenious acid, 10 parts; nitric acid, 5 parts; cupric sulfate; water, 1,000 parts. Thep. 174 colors will vary depending on how long the objects are submerged in the solution.

Brass may be colored brown by using an acid solution of nitrate of silver and bismuth; or a light bronze by an acid solution of nitrate of silver and copper; or black by a solution of nitrate of copper.

Brass can be colored brown by using an acid solution of silver nitrate and bismuth; or a light bronze by an acid solution of silver nitrate and copper; or black by a solution of copper nitrate.

To copper plate aluminum, take 30 parts of sulphate of copper; 30 parts of cream of tartar; 25 parts of soda; and 1,000 parts of water. The article to be coated is merely dipped into the solution.

To copper plate aluminum, mix 30 parts of copper sulfate, 30 parts of cream of tartar, 25 parts of soda, and 1,000 parts of water. Simply dip the item you want to coat into the solution.

Polishers.—Floor Polish. Permanganate of potash in boiling water, applied to the floor hot, will produce a stain, the color being dependent on the number of coats. The floor may them be polished with beeswax and turpentine.

Shiners.—Floor Polish. Potassium permanganate mixed with boiling water, applied to the floor while hot, will create a stain, with the color varying based on how many coats are applied. The floor can then be polished using beeswax and turpentine.

For Furniture. Make a paste of equal parts of plaster of paris, whiting, pumice stone and litharge, mixed with Japan dryer, boiled linseed oil and turpentine. This may be colored to suit. This will fill the cracks of the wood. Afterwards rub over the entire surface of the wood with a mixture of 1 part Japan, 2 of linseed oil, and three parts of turpentine, also colored, and after this has been allowed to slightly harden, rub it off, and within a day or two it will have hardened sufficiently so that the surface can be polished.

For Furniture. Make a paste using equal parts of plaster of Paris, whiting, pumice stone, and litharge, mixed with Japan dryer, boiled linseed oil, and turpentine. You can add color to match your preference. This will help fill the cracks in the wood. After that, apply a mixture of 1 part Japan, 2 parts linseed oil, and 3 parts turpentine, also colored, over the entire wood surface. Once this mixture has slightly hardened, wipe it off, and in about a day or two, it will harden enough for the surface to be polished.

Stove Polish. Ceresine, 12 parts; Japan wax,p. 175 10 parts; turpentine oil, 100 parts; lampblack, 12 parts; graphite, 10 parts. Melt the ceresine and wax together, and cool off partly, and then add and stir in the graphite and lampblack which were previously mixed up with the turpentine.

Stove Polish. Ceresine, 12 parts; Japan wax,p. 175 10 parts; turpentine oil, 100 parts; lampblack, 12 parts; graphite, 10 parts. Melt the ceresine and wax together, let it cool slightly, then mix in the graphite and lampblack that have been blended with the turpentine.

Putty.—Black Putty. Whiting and antimony sulphide, and soluble glass. This can be polished finely after hardening.

Putty.—Black Putty. White lead and antimony sulfide, along with soluble glass. This can be polished smoothly after it hardens.

Common Putty. Whiting and linseed oil mixed up to form a dough.

Common Putty: A mixture of whiting and linseed oil combined to create a dough.

Rust Preventive.—For Machinery. Dissolve an ounce of camphor in one pound of melted lard. Mix with this enough fine black lead to give it an iron color. After it has been on for a day, rub off with a cloth.

Rust Prevention.—For Machinery. Dissolve one ounce of camphor in one pound of melted lard. Mix in enough fine black lead to achieve an iron color. After it's been on for a day, wipe it off with a cloth.

For tools, yellow vaseline is the best substance.

For tools, yellow Vaseline is the best option.

For zinc, clean the plate by immersing in water that has a small amount of sulphuric acid in it. Then wash clean and coat with asphalt varnish.

For zinc, clean the plate by soaking it in water with a little bit of sulfuric acid. Then rinse it thoroughly and apply asphalt varnish.

Solders.—For aluminum. Use 5 parts of tin and 1 part of aluminum as the alloy, and solder with the iron or a blow pipe.

Soldering materials.—For aluminum. Use 5 parts tin and 1 part aluminum for the alloy, and solder it with an iron or a blowpipe.

Yellow hard solder. Brass, 3 1/2 parts; and zinc, 1 part.

Yellow hard solder. Brass, 3 ½ parts; and zinc, 1 part.

For easily fusing, make an alloy of equal parts of brass and zinc.

To make it easy to fuse, create an alloy with equal parts of brass and zinc.

For a white hard solder use brass, 12 parts; zinc, 1 part; and tin, 2 parts.

For a white hard solder, use 12 parts brass, 1 part zinc, and 2 parts tin.

p. 176

Soldering Fluxes.—For soft soldering, use a solution of chloride of zinc and sal ammoniac. Powdered rosin is also used.

Soldering Fluxes.—For soft soldering, use a solution of zinc chloride and ammonium chloride. Powdered rosin is also used.

For hard soldering, borax is used most frequently.

For hard soldering, borax is the most commonly used.

A mixture of equal parts of cryolite and barium chloride is very good in soldering bronze or aluminum alloys.

A mix of equal parts of cryolite and barium chloride works really well for soldering bronze or aluminum alloys.

Other hard solders are alloyed as follows: brass, 4 parts; and zinc, 5 parts. Also brass, 7 parts; and zinc, 2 parts.

Other hard solders are made with these alloys: brass, 4 parts; and zinc, 5 parts. Also brass, 7 parts; and zinc, 2 parts.

Steel Tempering-.-Heat the steel red hot and then plunge it into sealing wax.

Steel Hardening-.-Heat the steel until it’s red hot and then dip it into sealing wax.

For tempering small steel springs, they may be plunged into a fish oil which has a small amount of rosin and tallow.

To temper small steel springs, they can be dipped into fish oil that contains a little rosin and tallow.

Varnishes.—Black Varnish. Shellac, 5 parts; borax, 2 parts; glycerine, 2 parts; aniline black, 6 parts; water, 45 parts. Dissolve the shellac in hot water and add the other ingredients at a temperature of 200 degrees.

Finishes.—Black Varnish. Shellac, 5 parts; borax, 2 parts; glycerin, 2 parts; aniline black, 6 parts; water, 45 parts. Dissolve the shellac in hot water and add the other ingredients at a temperature of 200 degrees.

A good can varnish is made by dissolving 15 parts of shellac, and adding thereto 2 parts of Venice turpentine, 8 parts of sandarac, and 75 parts of spirits.

A good varnish is made by dissolving 15 parts of shellac and adding 2 parts of Venice turpentine, 8 parts of sandarac, and 75 parts of spirits.

A varnish for tin and other small metal boxes is made of 75 parts alcohol, which dissolves 15 parts of shellac, and 3 parts of turpentine.

A varnish for tin and other small metal boxes is made of 75 parts alcohol, which dissolves 15 parts of shellac, and 3 parts of turpentine.

Sealing Wax.—For modeling purposes. White p. 177 wax, 20 parts; turpentine, 5 parts; sesame oil, 2 parts; vermilion, 2 parts.

Sealing Wax.—For modeling purposes. White p. 177 wax, 20 parts; turpentine, 5 parts; sesame oil, 2 parts; vermilion, 2 parts.

Ordinary Sealing. 4 pounds of shellac, 1 pound Venice turpentine, add 3 pounds of vermilion. Unite by heat.

Ordinary Sealing. 4 pounds of shellac, 1 pound of Venice turpentine, add 3 pounds of vermilion. Combine using heat.


CHAPTER XVIToC

HANDY TABLES

TABLE OF WEIGHTS FOR ROUND AND SQUARE STEEL.

The Estimate is on the basis of Lineal Feet. 1 cu. ft. of Steel—490 lbs.

The estimate is based on linear feet. 1 cubic foot of steel weighs 490 lbs.

Sizes in
Inches
Weight in Pounds Sizes in
Inches
Weight in Pounds
Round Square Round Square
      
1/16 .110 .013 1/16 3.014 3.400
1/8 .042 .053 1/8 3.379 3.838
3/16.094.1193/163.7664.303
1/4.167.2121/44.1734.795
5/16.261.3335/164.6005.312
3/8.375.4783/85.0495.857
7/16.511.6517/165.5186.428
1/2.667.8501/26.0087.650
9/16.8451.0269/166.5207.650
5/81.0431.3285/87.0518.301
11/161.2621.608Nov 167.6048.978
3/41.5021.9133/48.17810.410
13/161.7732.24513/168.77311.170
7/82.0442.6037/89.38811.950
15/162.3472.98915/1610.02012.760
12.6703.400210.68013.600
      
p. 179

WEIGHT OF FLAT STEEL BARS.

Thickness
in
Inches
Width
                   
1/16 .212 .265 .32 .372 .425 .477 .53 .588 .63
1/8 .425 .53 .64 .745 .85 .955 1.06 1.17 1.27
3/16 .638 .797 .957 1.11 1.28 1.44 1.59 1.75 1.91
1/4 .85 1.06 1.28 1.49 1.70 1.91 2.12 2.34 2.55
5/16 1.06 1.33 1.59 1.86 2.12 2.39 2.65 2.92 3.19
3/8 1.28 1.59 1.92 2.23 2.55 2.87 3.19 3.51 3.83
7/16 1.49 1.85 2.23 2.60 2.98 3.35 3.72 4.09 4.46
1/2 1.70 2.12 2.55 2.98 3.40 3.83 4.25 4.67 5.10
9/16 1.92 2.39 2.87 3.35 3.83 4.30 4.78 5.26 5.74
5/8 2.12 2.65 3.19 3.72 4.25 4.78 5.31 5.84 6.38
11/16 2.34 2.92 3.51 4.09 4.67 5.26 5.84 6.43 7.02
3/4 2.55 3.19 3.83 4.47 5.10 5.75 6.38 7.02 7.65
13/16 2.76 3.45 4.14 4.48 5.53 6.21 6.90 7.60 8.29
7/8 2.98 3.72 4.47 5.20 5.95 6.69 7.44 8.18 8.93
15/16 3.19 3.99 4.78 5.58 6.38 7.18 7.97 8.77 9.57
1 3.40 4.25 5.10 5.95 6.80 7.65 8.50 9.35 10.20
                   

AVOIRDUPOIS WEIGHT.

For Merchandise of all kinds.

For all kinds of merchandise.

16 Drams (dr.) make 1 Ounce (oz.)
16 Ounces make 1 Pound (pd.)
25 Pounds make 1 Quarter (qr.)
4 Quarters, or 100 lbs., make 1 Hundredweight (cwt.)
20 Hundredweights make 1 Ton (T.)
2,240 Pounds make 1 Long ton (L. T.)

TROY WEIGHT.

For Gold, Silver, and Precious Metals.

For Gold, Silver, and Precious Metals.

24 Grains (gr.) make 1 Pennyweight (pwt.)
20 Pennyweights make 1 Ounce (oz.)
12 Ounces make 1 Pound (pd.)

APOTHECARIES WEIGHT.

For Drugs, Medicals and Chemicals.

For Drugs, Medicine, and Chemicals.

20 Grains (gr.) make 1 Scruple (sc.)
3 Scruples make 1 Dram (dr.)
8 Drams make 1 Pound (pd.)
12 Ounces make 1 Pound (pd.)
p. 181

LINEAR MEASURE.

For Surveyors' Use.

For Surveyors' Use Only.

12 Inches make 1 Foot
3 Feet make 1 Yard
1/2 Yards make 1 Rod
40 Rods make 1 Furlong
8 Furlongs make 1 Mile

LONG MEASURE.

12 Inches make 1 Foot
3 Feet make 1 Yard
6 Feet make 1 Fathom
Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. Yards make 1 Rod or pole
40 Poles make 1 Furlong
8 Furlongs make 1 Mile
3 Miles make 1 League
69 1/2 Leagues make 1 Degree

SQUARE MEASURE.

144 square inches make 1 square foot
9 square feet make 1 square yard
30 No changes needed. square yards make 1 square pole
40 square poles make 1 square rod
4 square rods make 1 acre
640 square acres make 1 acre mile
9 square feet make 1 square yard
p. 182

SOLID OR CUBIC MEASURE.

1,728 Cubic inches make 1 Cubic foot
27 Cubic feet make 1 Cubic yard
128 Cubic feet make 1 Cord of wood
24 3/4 Cubic feet make 1 Perch of stone

DRY MEASURE.

2 Pints make 1 Quart (qt.)
8 Quarts make 1 peck (pk.)
4 Pecks make 1 Bushel (bu.)
36 Bushels make 1 Chaldron (ch.)

LIQUID MEASURE.

4 Gills (g.) make 1 Pint (pt.)
4 Quarts make 1 Gallon (gal.)
31 1/2 Gallons make 1 Barrel (bbl.)
2 Bbls., or 63 gals., make 1 Hogshead (hhd.)

PAPER MEASURE.

24 Sheets (sh.) make 1 Quire (qu.)
20 Quires make 1 Ream (r.)
10 Reams make 1 Bale (ba.) or bundle.
p. 183

TABLE OF TEMPERATURES.

Greatest artificial cold 220     degrees below Fahr.
     “   natural      “    39    
Mercury freezes 73.7  
Mixture of snow and salt 4     
Greatest density of water at 39.2   above
Blood Heat 97.9  
Alcohol boils 172.4  
Water boils 212     
Mercury boils 662     
Sulphur boils 824     
Silver melts 1,749     
Cast iron melts 2,786     

STRENGTH OF VARIOUS METALS.

The tests are made by using a cubic inch of the metal and compressing it, and by trying to draw apart a square inch of metal. Indicated in pounds

The tests are done by taking a cubic inch of the metal and squeezing it, and by attempting to pull apart a square inch of metal. Indicated in pounds

p. 184
  Tension Compression
     
Aluminum15,00012,000
Brass, cast24,00030,000
Bronze, gun metal 32,000 20,000
    “    manganese 60,000 120,000
    “    phosphor 50,000 . . . . . .
Copper, cast 24,000 40,000
    “    wire annealed 36,000 . . . . . .
    “    unannealed 60,000 . . . . . .
Iron, cast 15,000 . . . . . .
    “    “    annealed 60,000 80,000
    “    “    unannealed 80,000 . . . . . .
    “    wrought 48,000 46,000
Lead, cast 2,000 . . . . . .
Steel castings 70,000 70,000
    “    plow 270,000 . . . . . .
    “    structural 60,000 60,000
    “    wire annealed 80,000 . . . . . .
    “    crucible 180,000 . . . . . .
Tin 3,800 6,000
     
p. 185

FREEZING MIXTURES

Mixtures Temperature Changes in
Degrees Fahrenheit
From To
    
Common salt, 1 part; snow, 3 parts32 zero .0
Common salt, 1 part; snow 1 part32 - .4
Calcium chloride, 3 parts; snow 1 part32 -27
Calcium chloride, 2 parts; snow 1 part32 -44
Sal ammoniac, 5 parts; salt-peter 5 parts; water 16 parts50 -10
Sal ammoniac, 1 parts; salt-peter 1 part; water 1 part46 -11
Ammonium nitrate, 1 part; water 1 part50 - 3
Potassium hydrate, 4 parts; snow 3 parts32 -35
    

IGNITION TEMPERATURES.

Phosphorus 120 degrees Fahrenheit
Bi-sulphide of carbon 300
Gun-cotton 430
Nitro-glycerine 490
Phosphorus, amorphous 500
Rifle powder 550
Charcoal 660
Dry pine wood 800
Oak 900

POWER AND HEAT EQUIVALENTS.

In studying matters pertaining to power and heat, certain terms are used, such as horsepower, horsepower-hours, watts, watt-hours, kilowatt, kilowatt-hours, foot-pounds, joule, and B. T. U. (British Thermal Unit).

In studying topics related to power and heat, certain terms are used, such as horsepower, horsepower-hours, watts, watt-hours, kilowatt, kilowatt-hours, foot-pounds, joules, and B.T.U. (British Thermal Unit).

The following tables give a comprehensive idea of the values of the different terms:

The following tables provide a complete overview of the values of the different terms:

1 Horsepower-hour = 0.746 kilowatt-hour = 1,980,000 foot-pounds of water evaporated at 212 degrees Fahrenheit, raised from 62 degrees to 212 degrees.
1 Kilowatt-hour = 1,000 watt-hours = 1.34 horse-power-hours = 2,653,200 foot-pounds = 3,600,000 joules = 3,420 B. T. U. = 3.54 pounds of water evaporated at 212 degrees = 22.8 pounds of water raised from 62 to 212 degrees.
1 Horsepower = 746 watts = 0.746 kilowatts.= 33,000 foot-pounds per second = 2,550 B. T. U. per min. = 0.71 B. T. U. per second = 2.64 pounds of water evaporated per hour at 212 degrees.
1 Kilowatt = 1,000 watts = 1.34 horsepower = 2,653,200 foot-pounds per hour = 44,220 foot-pounds per min. = 737 foot-pounds per second = 3,420 B. T. U. per hour = 57 B. T. U. per min. = 0.95 B. T. U. per second = 3.54 pounds of water p. 187 evaporated per hour at 212.
1 Watt = 1 joule per second = 0.00134 horse-power = 0.001 kilowatt = 342 B. T. U. per hour = 44.22 foot-pounds per min. = 0.74 foot-pounds per second = 0.0035 pounds of water evaporated per hour at 212 degrees.
1 B. T. U. (British Thermal Unit) = 1,052 watt-seconds = 778 foot-pounds = 0.252 calorie = 0.000292 kilowatt-hours = 0.000391 horsepower-hour = 0.00104 pounds of water evaporated at 212 degrees.
1 Foot-pound = 1.36 joule = 0.000000377 kilowatt-hour = 0.00129 B. T. U. = 0.0000005 horsepower-hour.
1 Joule = 1 watt-second = 0.000000278 kilowatt-hour = 0.00095 B. T. U. = 0.74 foot-pounds.

CHAPTER XVIIToC

INVENTIONS AND PATENTS, AND INFORMATION ABOUT
THE RIGHTS AND DUTIES OF INVENTORS
AND WORKMEN

There is no trade or occupation which calls forth the inventive faculty to a greater degree than the machinist's. Whether it be in the direction of making some new tool, needed in some special work, or in devising a particular movement, or mechanical expedient, the machinist must be prepared to meet the issues and decide on the best structural arrangement.

There’s no job or profession that engages creativity more than being a machinist. Whether it’s about creating a new tool for a specific task or figuring out a particular movement or mechanical solution, the machinist needs to be ready to tackle challenges and determine the best design.

Opportunities also come daily to the workers in machine shops to a greater extent than other artisans, because inventors in every line bring inventions to them to be built and experimentally tested.

Opportunities also come daily to workers in machine shops more than for other artisans, because inventors in every field bring their inventions to them to be constructed and tested out.

A knowledge of the rights and duties of inventors, and of the men who build the models, is very desirable; and for your convenience we append the following information:

Knowing the rights and responsibilities of inventors, as well as those who create the models, is very important; and for your convenience, we provide the following information:

The inventor of a device is he who has conceived an idea and has put it into some concrete form.

The person who invents a device is someone who has come up with an idea and has turned it into a real, tangible object.

A mere idea is not an invention.

A simple idea isn't an invention.

The article so conceived and constructed, mustp. 189 be both new and useful. There must be some utility. It may be simply a toy, or something to amuse.

The article, as envisioned and put together, mustp. 189 be both new and useful. It needs to have some practical value. It could just be a toy or something to entertain.

If A has an idea, and he employs and pays B to work out the device, and put it into practical shape, A is the inventor, although B may have materially modified, or even wholly changed it. B is simply the agent or tool to bring it to perfection, and his pay for doing the work is his compensation.

If A has an idea and hires B to develop the device and make it functional, A is the inventor, even if B has significantly altered or completely transformed it. B is just the person who helps refine it, and his payment for the work is his compensation.

An inventor has two years' time within which he may apply for a patent, after he has completed his device and begun the sale of it. If he sells the article for more than two years before applying for a patent, this will bar a grant.

An inventor has two years to apply for a patent after completing their device and starting to sell it. If they sell the item for more than two years before applying for a patent, they will be barred from getting one.

Two or more inventors may apply for a patent, provided each has contributed something toward bringing it to its perfected state. Each cannot apply separately. The patent issued will be owned by them jointly.

Two or more inventors can apply for a patent, as long as each has contributed something toward making it complete. They can't apply separately. The patent granted will be owned jointly by them.

Joint owners of a patent are not partners, unless they have signed partnership papers respecting the patent. Because they are partners in some other enterprise, disconnected from the patent, that does not constitute them partners in the patent. They are merely joint owners.

Joint owners of a patent aren't partners unless they've signed partnership agreements related to the patent. Just because they are partners in a different venture unrelated to the patent doesn't make them partners in the patent. They are simply joint owners.

If they have no special agreement with respect to the patent each can grant licenses to manufacp. 190ture, independently of the others, without being compelled to account to the others, and each has a right to sell his interest without asking permission of the others.

If there’s no special agreement about the patent, each person can grant licenses to manufacture on their own, without needing to report to the others, and each person has the right to sell their share without asking for permission from anyone else.

An inventor is one who has devised an invention. A patentee is one who owns a patent, or an interest in one, be he the inventor or not.

An inventor is someone who has created an invention. A patentee is someone who owns a patent, or has an interest in one, whether they are the inventor or not.

The United States government does not grant Caveats. The only protection offered is by way of patent.

The United States government doesn’t grant Caveats. The only protection provided is through patents.

A patent runs for a period of seventeen years, and may be renewed by act of Congress only, for a further term of seven years.

A patent lasts for seventeen years and can be extended for an additional seven years only by an act of Congress.

An interference is a proceeding in the Patent Office to determine who is the first inventor of a device. The following is a brief statement of the course followed:

An interference is a process in the Patent Office to figure out who was the first inventor of a device. Here’s a quick overview of the steps taken:

When two or more applicants have applications pending, which, in the opinion of the Examiner, appear to be similar, the Office may declare an interference.

When two or more applicants have pending applications that seem similar in the Examiner's view, the Office may declare an interference.

If an applicant has an application pending, and the Examiner rejects it on reference to a patent already issued, the applicant may demand an interference, and the Office will then grant a hearing to determine which of the two is entitled to the patent.

If someone has an application in progress and the Examiner rejects it based on a previously issued patent, the applicant can request an interference, and the Office will arrange a hearing to decide which of the two is entitled to the patent.

The first step, after the declaration of interferp. 191ence, is to request that each applicant file a preliminary statement, under oath, in which he must set forth the following:

The first step, after declaring interference, is to ask each applicant to submit a preliminary statement, under oath, where they must outline the following:

First: The date of conception of the invention.

First: The date when the invention was conceived.

Second: Date of the first reduction to writing, or the preparation of drawings.

Second: Date of the first written record or the creation of drawings.

Third: Date of making of the first model or device.

Third: Date the first model or device was created.

Fourth: When a complete machine was first produced.

Fourth: When a fully functioning machine was first created.

These statements are filed in the Patent Office, and opened on the same day, and times are then set for the respective parties to take testimony.

These statements are submitted to the Patent Office and opened on the same day, after which times are scheduled for the relevant parties to provide their testimony.

If one of the parties was the first to conceive and reduce to practice, as well as the first to file his application, he will be adjudged to be the first inventor, without necessitating the taking of testimony.

If one of the parties was the first to come up with an idea and turn it into a reality, as well as the first to submit their application, they will be recognized as the first inventor, without needing to provide any testimony.

If, on the other hand, one was the first to conceive, and the other the first to file, then testimony will be required to determine the question of invention.

If, on the other hand, one person was the first to come up with the idea and the other was the first to file for it, then evidence will be needed to settle the issue of who actually invented it.

The granting of a patent is not conclusive that the patentee was, in reality, the first inventor. The law is that the patent must issue to the first inventor, and if it can be proven that another party was the first, a new patent will issue to the one who thus establishes his right. The Commisp. 192sioner of Patents has no right to take away the patent first issued. Only the Courts are competent to do this.

The granting of a patent doesn’t necessarily mean the patent holder was actually the first inventor. The law states that the patent must be issued to the first inventor, and if it can be proven that someone else was first, a new patent will be granted to whoever proves their claim. The Commisp. 192sioner of Patents has no authority to revoke the initially issued patent. Only the Courts have the power to do that.

A patent is granted for the right to make, to use and to vend.

A patent gives you the right to make, use, and sell.

An owner of a patent cannot sell the right only to make, or to sell, or to use. Such a document would be a simple license, only, for that particular purpose.

An owner of a patent can't just sell the right to make, sell, or use it. That kind of document would only be a simple license for that specific purpose.

A patent may be sold giving a divided, or an undivided right.

A patent can be sold with either a divided or an undivided right.

A divided right is where a State, or any other particular territorial right is granted. An undivided right is a quarter, or a half, or some other portion in the patent itself.

A divided right is where a state or another specific territorial right is given. An undivided right is a quarter, half, or some other share stated in the patent itself.

If an inventor assigns his invention, and states in the granting clause that he conveys "all his right and title in and to the invention," or words to that effect, he conveys all his rights throughout the world.

If an inventor assigns his invention and states in the granting clause that he transfers "all his right and title in and to the invention," or similar wording, he transfers all his rights worldwide.

If the conveyance says, "all rights and title in and throughout the United States," he thereby reserves all other countries.

If the conveyance states, "all rights and title in and throughout the United States," it effectively reserves all other countries.

If a patent is issued, and the number and date of the patent are given, the assignment conveys the patent for the United States only, unless foreign countries are specifically mentioned.

If a patent is granted and the patent number and date are provided, the assignment transfers the patent for the United States only, unless foreign countries are specifically named.

To convey an invention or patent, some definitep. 193 number or filing date must be given in the document, with sufficient clearness and certainty to show the intent of the assignor.

To transfer an invention or patent, some specificp. 193 number or filing date must be included in the document, clearly and definitively showing the intent of the assignor.

An invention does not depend on quantity, but on quality. It is that which produces a new and a useful result.

An invention isn't about how much there is, but about how good it is. It's what creates a new and useful result.

In the United States patents are granted for the purpose of promoting the useful arts and sciences.

In the United States, patents are issued to encourage the advancement of useful arts and sciences.

In England, and in many other foreign countries, patents are granted, not on account of any merit on the part of the inventor, but as a favor of the crown, or sovereign.

In England, and in many other countries, patents are given, not because of any merit from the inventor, but as a privilege from the crown or sovereign.

Originally patents were granted by the crown for the exclusive privilege in dealing in any commodity, and for this right a royal fee was exacted. From this fact the term royalty originated.

Originally, patents were granted by the crown for the exclusive right to trade in any commodity, and the crown charged a royal fee for this privilege. This is where the term royalty comes from.

An international agreement is now in force among nearly all countries, which respects the filing of an application in any country, for a period of one year in the other countries.

An international agreement is now active in almost every country, allowing the filing of an application in any country for a period of one year in the other countries.

In making an application for a patent, a petition is required, a specification showing its object, use, and particular construction, followed by a claim, or claims, and accompanied by a drawing, if the invention will permit of it, (which must be made in black, with India ink), and an oath.

When applying for a patent, you need to submit a petition, a specification that outlines its purpose, use, and specific construction, along with a claim or claims. If the invention allows for it, a drawing must also be included (which should be made in black with India ink), as well as an oath.

The oath requires the following assertions: That the applicant is the first and original inventorp. 194 of the device, and that he does not know and does not believe the same was ever known or used before his invention or more than two years before his application.

The oath includes these statements: That the applicant is the first and original inventorp. 194 of the device, and that he is unaware of and does not believe that it was ever known or used before his invention or more than two years prior to his application.

He must also further allege that the invention was not patented or described in any printed publication here or abroad, and not manufactured more than two years prior to the application, and that he has not made an application, nor authorized any one to do so more than two years prior to his application.

He must also state that the invention wasn't patented or detailed in any published materials, whether here or abroad, and that it hasn't been produced more than two years before the application, and that he hasn't submitted an application or allowed anyone else to do so more than two years before his application.

The first Government fee is $15, payable at the time of filing, and the second and final fee is $20, payable at the time the patent is ordered to issue.

The first government fee is $15, due when you file, and the second and final fee is $20, due when the patent is set to be issued.

The filing of an application for patent is a secret act, and the Patent Office will not give any information to others concerning it, prior to the issue of the patent

Filing a patent application is a confidential process, and the Patent Office will not share any information about it with others until the patent is granted.


GLOSSARY OF WORDS
USED IN TEXT OF THIS VOLUMEToC

Abrupt.Suddenly; coming without warning.
Abrasive.A material which wears away.
Actuate.Influenced, as by sudden motive; incited to action.
Accumulate.To bring together; to amass; to collect.
Acoustics.The branch of physics which treats of sound.
Adhesion.To hold together; a molecular force by means of which particles stick together.
Affinity.Any natural drawing together; the property or force in chemicals to move toward each other.
Aggravate.To incite; to make worse or more burdensome.
Alloy.A combination of two or more metals.
Altitude.Height; a vertical distance above any point.
Alkali.Any substance which will neutralize an acid, as lime, magnesia, and the like.
Amalgam.Any compound of metal which has mercury as one of the elements.
Amiss.Wrong, fault, misdeed.
Annealing.A process of gradually heating and cooling metals, whereby hardness and toughness are brought about.
Angle plate.A metal structure which has two bodies, or limbs, at right angles to each other.
Analysis.The separating of substances into their elementary forms.
Anchor bolt.A structure intended to be placed in a hole in a wall, and held there by a brew which expands a part of the structure. p. 196
Apprentice.One who is learning a trade or occupation.
Artificial.That which resembles the original; made in imitation of.
Arbor.A shaft, spindle, mandrel, or axle.
Armature.A metallic body within the magnetic field of a magnet.
Arbitrary.Stubborn determination. Doing a thing without regard to consequences.
Artisan.One skilled in any mechanical art.
Attributable.That which belongs to or is associated with.
Automatically.Operating by its own structure, or without outside aid.
Augmented.Added to; to increase.
Auxiliary.To aid; giving or furnishing aid.
Avoirdupois.The system of weights, of which the unit is sixteen ounces.
Back-saw.A saw which has a rib at its upper margin.
Barleycorn.A grain of barley.
Bastard.A coarse-grained file.
B. T. U.British Thermal Unit.
Back-gear.That gear on a lathe for changing the feed.
Bevel.Not in a right line; slanting; oblique.
Bibb.A form of water faucet.
Bit, or bitt.A form of tool for cutting purposes on a lathe, planer, shaper, or drilling machine.
Borax.A white crystalline compound, of a sweetish taste. Chemically it is sodium biborate.
Buffs.Usually a wheel covered with leather or cloth, and having emery dust on it, for fine polishing purposes.
Buffeted.Thrown back.
Bronze.An alloy of copper and tin.
Calcium.Lime.
Cant.A form of lever. p. 197
Carbonate.A salt of carbonic acid.
Caustic.Capable of corroding or eating away.
Capillary.That quality of a liquid which causes it to move upwardly or along a solid with which it is in contact.
Caliper.An instrument for spanning inside and outside dimensions.
Centripetal.The force which tends to draw inwardly, or to the center.
Centrifugal.The outwardly-moving force from a body.
Centering.To form a point equidistant from a circular line.
Chloride.A compound of chlorine with one or more positive elements, such as, for instance, salt.
Circular pitch.The measurement around a gear taken at a point midway between the base and end of the teeth.
Circumference.The outside of a circular body.
Clef.A character placed on a staff of music to determine the pitch.
Clutch.A mechanical element for attaching one part to another.
Chuck, Independent.A disk of metal to be attached to the live spindle of a lathe, and which has on its face a set of dogs which move radially independently of each other.
Chuck, Universal.A disk to be attached as above, provided with dogs which are connected so they move radially in unison with each other.
Classified.Arranged in order, in such a manner that each of a kind is placed under a suitable heading.
Clearance.To provide a space behind the cutting edge of a tool which will not touch the work being cut.
Consistency.Harmonious; not contradictory.
Coherer.That instrument in a wireless telegraphy apparatus which detects the electrical impulses. p. 198
Commutator.The cylindrical structure on the end of an armature, which is designed to change the polarity of the current.
Concentrated.Brought together at one point.
Coinage.The system of making money from metals.
Compound.The unity of two or more elements.
Constant.Being insistent and consistent; also a term to be used in a problem which never varies.
Conversion.The change from one state to another.
Cone.A body larger at one end than at another; usually applied to a form which is cylindrical in shape but tapering, from end to end.
Compression.The bringing together of particles, or molecules.
Convolute.A spiral form of winding, like a watch spring.
Coiled.A form of winding, like a string wound around a bobbin.
Conductivity.Applied generally to the quality of material which will carry a current of electricity; also a quality of a material to convey heat.
Cohesion.The force by which the molecules of the same kind are held together.
Concentric.A line which is equidistant at all points from a center.
Confined.Held within certain bounds.
Corpuscular.Molecular or atomic form.
Converge.To come together from all points.
Concave.A surface which is depressed or sunken.
Convex.A surface which is raised, or projects beyond the surface of the edges.
Component.One of the elements in a problem or in a compound.
Coefficient.A number indicating the degree or quality possessed by a substance. An invariable unit.
Cube.A body having six equal sides. p. 199
Cross-section.A term used to designate that line which is at right angles to the line running from the view point.
Cross slide.The metal plate on a lathe which holds the tool post, and which is controlled, usually, by a screw.
Contiguous.Close to; near at hand.
Countersink.The depression around a bore.
Collet.A collar, clutch or clamping piece, which has jaws to hold a bar or rod.
Countershaft.A shaft which has thereon pulleys or gears to connect operatively with the gears or pulleys on a machine, and change the speed.
Conducive.Tending to; promotive of a result.
Corundum.An extremely hard aluminum oxide used for polishing.
Cold chisel.A term applied to an extremely hard chisel used for cutting and chipping metal.
Combustion.The action or operation of burning.
Conjunctively.Acting together.
Comparatively.Similitude or resemblance, one with another.
Cotter.A key to prevent a wheel turning on its shaft.
Dead center.A term used to designate the inoperative point of the crank.
Depicting.Showing; setting forth.
Deodorant.A substance which will decompose odors.
Developer.A chemical which will bring out the picture in making the film or plate in photography.
Decimeter.The length of one-tenth of a meter in the metric system.
Decameter.The length of ten meters in the metric system.
Defective.Not perfect; wrong in some particular.
Diaphragm.A plate, such as used in a telephone system, to receive and transmit vibrations. p. 200
Dissolving.To change from a solid to a liquid condition.
Division plate.A perforated plate in a gear-cutting machine, to aid in dividing the teeth of a wheel.
Dispelled.To drive away or scatter.
Disinfectant.A material which will destroy harmful germs.
Diametral pitch.The number of teeth in a gear as calculated on the pitch line.
Dimension.Measurement; size.
Ductility.That property of metal which permits it to be drawn out, or worked.
Dividers.An instrument, like a compass, for stepping off measurements, or making circles.
Diverge.Spreading out from a common point.
Drift.A cutting tool for smoothing a hole in a piece of metal.
Duplex.Two; double.
Dynamite.An explosive composed of an absorbent, like earth, combined with nitro-glycerine.
Dynamometer.An instrument for measuring power developed.
Eccentric.Out of center.
Echoes.The reflection of sound.
Effervesce.The action due to the unity of two opposite chemicals.
Efficiency.The term applied to the quality of effectiveness.
Ellipse.A form which is oblong, or having a shape, more or less, like the longitudinal section of an egg.
Electrolytic.The action of a current of water passing through a liquid, and decomposing it, and carrying elements from one electrode to the other.
Elasticity.The quality in certain substances to be drawn out of their normal shape, and by virtue of which they will resume their original form when released. p. 201
Embedded.To be placed within a body or substance.
Emerge.To come out of.
Emphasize.To lay particular stress upon.
Emery.A hard substance, usually some of the finely divided precious stones, and used for polishing and grinding purposes.
Enormous.A large amount; great in size.
Enunciated.Proclaimed; given out.
Equalization.To put on an even basis; to make the same comparatively.
Eradicator.To take out; to cause to disappear.
Escapement.A piece of mechanism devised for the purpose of giving a uniform rate of speed to the movement of wheels.
Essential.The important feature; the principal thing.
Expansion.To enlarge; growing greater.
Equidistant.The same distance from a certain point.
Evolved.Brought out of; the result of certain considerations.
Facet.A face.
Facilitated.Made easy.
Flux.Any substance which will aid in uniting material under heat. The act of uniting.
Fluid.Any substance in which the particles freely interchange positions.
Flour emery.Emery which is finely ground.
Flexible.The quality of any material which will permit bending.
Float cut.The term when applied to a tool where the cut is an easy one.
Flexure.The springing yield in a substance.
Foot pound.A unit, usually determined by the number of pounds raised one foot in one second of time. 550 pounds raised one foot in one second of time, means so many foot pounds. p. 202
Formulate.To arrange; to put in order from a certain consideration of things.
Focus.The center of a circle.
Foci.One of the points of an ellipse.
Formation.The structure of a machine or of a compound.
Fractured.Broken.
Fundamental.Basis; the first form; the original structure.
Fulcrum.The resting place for a lever.
Fusion.Melting. The change of a metal from a solid to a liquid state by heat.
Fusible.That which is capable of being melted.
Fulminate.A substance that will ignite or explode by heat or friction.
Gamut.The scale of sound or light, or vibrations of any kind.
Gear.A toothed wheel of any kind.
Gelatine.A tasteless transparent substance obtained from animal tissues.
Globular.Having the form of a globe or ball.
Glazed.Having a glossary appearance.
Graphite.A metallic, iron-black variety of carbon.
Graduated.To arrange in steps; a regular order or series.
Grinder.Any mechanism which abrades or wears down a substance.
Gullet.The curved notches or grooves between projecting parts of mechanism.
Harmonizing.To make the various parts act together in unison.
H. P.The symbol for horse power.
Helico.A form resembling that of the threads of a screw.
Hexagon.Six-sided.
Heliograph.The system of signaling by using flashlights.
Horizontal.Things level with the surface of the earth; like the surface of water.
Hydrogen.The lightest of all the elements. A tasteless, colorless substance. p. 203
Import.To bear, or convey as a meaning.
Impulse.The application of an impelling force.
Impact.A collision; striking against.
Invariably.Constant; without failing.
Inertia.The quality of all materials to remain at rest, or to continue in motion, unless acted on by some external force.
Intersect.To divide at a certain point. The crossing point of one line over another.
Interval.A space; a distance between.
Intensity.Strained or exerted to a high degree.
Interstices.The spaces between the molecules or atoms in a substance.
Intermediate.Between.
Intermeshing.The locking together of gear wheels.
Internal.That which is within.
Inability.Unable to perform or do.
Initial.The first; at the start.
Increment.One of the parts which go to make up the whole.
Inference.Drawing a conclusion from a certain state of things.
Insoluble.A substance which cannot be liquefied by a liquid.
Indentations.Recesses, or cut-out parts or places.
Induction.The movement of electricity through the air from one conductor to another.
Inflammable.That which will burn.
Inclining.At an angle; sloping.
Inconsequential.Not of much importance.
Isometric.That view of a figure which will give the relation of all the parts in their proper proportions.
Jaw.The grasping part of a vise, or other tool.
Joule.The practical unit of electrical energy.
Key-way.A groove in a shaft and in the hub of a wheel, to receive therein a locking key. p. 204
Kilowatt.A unit of electrical power; one thousand watts.
Kinetic.Consisting of motion.
Lacing.The attaching of the ends of a belt to each other.
Lap.A tool, usually of copper or lead, on which flour emery is spread, with oil, and used to grind out the interior of cylinders.
Lapping.The act of using a lap to grind out cylinders.
Lacquer.A varnish for either wood or metal.
Lazy-tongs.A form of tool, by means of which a long range of movement is attainable, and great grasp of power.
Levigated.Reduced to a fine powder.
Litharge.A form of lead used in paints for drying purposes.
Longitudinal.Lengthwise.
Luminous.That which has the capacity to light up.
Magnet.A bar of iron or steel that has electricity in it capable of attracting certain metals.
Manipulation.Capable of being handled.
Mandrel.The revolving part of a lathe; a rod or bar which turns and carries mechanical elements thereon.
Manually.Operated by hand.
Margin.An edge.
Malleability.Softness. The state of being formed by hammering.
Magnetism.A quality of certain metals to receive and hold a charge of electricity.
Major axis.The measurement across the longest part of an ellipse.
Minor axis.The distance across the narrowest part of an ellipse.
Meridian.The time when the sun crosses the middle of the heavens; midday.
Metric.Measure; a system which takes the unit of its measurement from the circumference of the earth.
Micrometer.A tool for measuring small spaces or intervals.
Milling machine.A large tool for the purpose of cutting gears and grooves or surfaces.
Miter.A meeting surface between two right-angled pieces. p. 205
Momentum.That quality of matter which is the combined energy of mass and speed.
Molecular.Any substance that is made up of any particles; the component elements in any substance.
Modifications.Changes; improved arrangements.
Multiplicity.Many; numerous; a large quantity.
Mutilated.As applied to a gear, one in which certain teeth are removed.
Nautical.Marine; applied to shipping, and the like.
Neutralizes.Any substance, like a chemical, which, when added to another chemical, will change them both.
Nitro-glycerine.An explosive made from glycerine and nitrogen.
Oblique.At an angle; inclined.
Obliterate.To wipe out.
Obvious.That which can be seen; easily observed.
Obtuse.A blunt angle; not noticeable.
Odophone.An instrument for determining and testing odors.
Olfactory.The nerves of the sense of smell.
Orifice.An opening; a hole.
Oscillation.A movement to and fro, like a pendulum.
Oxygen.The most universal gas, colorless and tasteless; is called the acid-maker of the universe and unites with all known substances, producing an acid, an alkali, or a neutral compound.
Oxidizing.To impart to any substance the elements of oxygen.
Oxide.Any substance which has oxygen added to it.
Pallet.A part of a tooth or finger which acts on the teeth of a wheel.
Parallel.Lines or sides at equal distance from each other from end to end. p. 206
Paraffine.A light-colored substance, produced from refined petroleum.
Perimeter.The outer margin of a wheel; the bounding line of any figure of two dimensions.
Periphery.The outer side of a wheel.
Peen.The nailing end of a hammer.
Persistence.That quality of all matter to continue on in its present condition.
Perpendicular.A line drawn at right angles to another.
Perpetual.Without end.
Perspective.A view of an object which takes in all parts at one side.
Physically.Pertaining to the body.
Phonautograph.An apparatus for recording sound.
Phonograph.An apparatus for taking and sending forth sound vibration.
Phenomena.Any occurrence in nature out of the ordinary.
Pitman.The rod or bar which connects the piston and crank.
Pivot.A point or bar on which anything turns.
Pinion.A small toothed wheel.
Pitch.The number of vibrations. The term used to give the number of teeth in a wheel.
Pitch diameter.The point from which the measurements are made in determining the pitch.
Pivoted.A bar, lever, or other mechanical element, arranged to turn on or about a point.
Plastic.A substance in such a state that it may be kneaded or worked.
Planer.A large tool designed to cut or face off wood or metal.
Porosity.The quality in all substances to have interstices, or points of separation, between the molecules.
Potential.The power.
Properties.The qualities possessed by all elements.
Projecting.The throwing forward. The sending out. p. 207
Promulgated.Put forth; enunciated.
Protractor.A mechanic's and draughtsman's tool by means of which angles may be formed.
Promote.To carry forward in a systematic way.
Precision.Work done with care; observing correct measurements.
Prony brake.A machine for determining horse power.
Punch.A small tool to be struck by a hammer in order to make an impression or indentation.
Quadrant.One-fourth of a circle.
Quadrant plate.A plate on which are placed lines and numbers indicating degrees.
Quadruplex.A term to designate that system of telegraphy in which four messages are sent over a single wire at the same time.
Ratchet.A wheel having teeth at certain intervals to catch the end of a pawl or finger.
Ratchet brace.A tool to hold a drill, having a reversible ratchet wheel.
Rasp cut.A cut of a file which is rough, not smooth.
Rake.The angle or inclination of the upper surface of the cutting tool of a lathe.
Reverse.To turn about; in the opposite direction.
Reciprocating.To go back and forth.
Revolve.To move in an orbit or circle, as a merry-go-round.
Reciprocity.To give back in like measure.
Reflection.The throwing back from a surface.
Resonance.The quality of vibration which adds to the original movement, and aids in perpetuating the sound.
Refraction.The quality of light which causes it to bend in passing through different substances.
Reducing.Bringing it down to a smaller compass.
Rectilinear.A straight line. p. 208
Retort.A furnace of refractory material to take high heat.
Reamer.A tool designed to enlarge or to smooth out holes.
Regulation.To do things in an orderly way; a system which sets forth certain requirements.
Refractory.Difficult to work, and not easily fused.
Recess.A hole, or a depression.
Rocking.A lever which rotates only part way and then moves in the opposite direction.
Rotate.A spindle which turns round. Compare revolve.
Rosin.Certain gums; particularly the sap of pine trees.
Roughing.The taking off of the first coating with a tool.
Saturated.A soluble substance which cannot be further dissolved by a liquid.
Scribe.To mark with a tool.
Screw plate.A tool which has within it means for adjusting different cutting tools.
Section lining.The marks made diagonally across drawings to indicate that the part is cut away.
Shaper.A large tool for surfacing off material, cutting grooves, and the like.
Shrinkage.The term applied to metals when cast, as all will be smaller when cold than when cast in the mold.
Slide rest.The part of the lathe which holds the tool post.
Sonorous.Having the quality of vibration.
Slotted.Grooved, or channeled.
Solvent.That which can be changed from a solid by liquids.
Spelter.A combination of zinc and copper. A hard solder.
Soldering.Uniting of two substances by a third, with heat.
Spindle.A small shaft.
Spur.The larger of two intermeshing gears.
Socket.A depression or hole.
Sprocket.Teeth in a wheel to receive a chain. p. 209
Spiral.A form wound like the threads of a screw.
Surface plate.A true surface made of metal, used as a means of determining evenness of the article made.
Sulphate.Any substance which is modified by sulphuric acid.
Substitute.An element or substance used for another.
Superposed.One placed above the other.
Swage.Tool for the purpose of changing the form in a material.
Swivel.A point on which another turns.
Surfacing.Taking off the outer coating or covering.
Tap.A small drill.
Tapering.An object with the sides out of parallel.
Tangential.A line from the periphery of a circle which projects out at an angle.
Tension.The exertion of a force.
Tenacity.The property of a material to hang together.
Tempering.Putting metal in such condition that it will be not only hard but tough as well.
Technical.Pertaining to the strict forms and terms of an art.
Texture.That of which the element or substance is composed.
Threads.The ridges, spiral in form, which run around a bolt.
Theoretically.The speculative form or belief in a subject.
Tinned.The term applied to the coating on a soldering iron with a fluxed metal.
Tines.Small blades. p. 210
Torsion.The force exerted around an object, like the action of a crank on a shaft.
Tommy.A lever to be inserted in a hole in a screw head for turning a screw.
Transmitting.Sending forth; to forward.
Trammel.A tool for the purpose of drawing ellipses.
Traction.Drawing; pulling power.
Tripping.A motion applied to a finger, which holds a pivoted arm, whereby the latter may be swung from its locked position.
Triangular.Having three sides and three angles.
Transverse.Across; at right angles to the long direction.
Undercut.A wall of a groove or recess which is sloping.
Undulatory.A wave-like motion, applied generally to light and electricity.
Unit.A base for calculating from.
Unison.Acting together; as one.
Unsized.Generally applied to the natural condition of paper or fabric which has no glue or other fixing substance on it.
Vaporising.To change from a liquid or solid to a gas.
Variation.Changing into different conditions; unlike forms.
Verge.The edge; usually applied to the shoulder of a watch spindle, particularly to the escapement.
Vertical.Up and down. The direction of a plumb line.
Velocity.The speed of an article through space.
Vitascope.An instrument for determining the rate of vibration of different substances.
Vibration.The movement to and fro of all elements, and by means of which we are made sensitive of the different forces.
Vocation.The business or the calling of a person. p. 211
Warding.The act of cutting a projection or guard, such as is usually found on the insides of locks, and the correspondent detent in the key.
Watt.In electricity the unit of the rate of working in a circuit. It is the electro-motive force of one volt and the current intensity of one ampere.

INDEXToC

(Figures indicate the pages)

A

p. 214

B

  • Ball, 75.
  • Ball and Socket, 74.
  • Balsam Peru, 168, 189, 173.
  • Barium Chloride, 176.
  • Bark, soap, 165.
  • Barleycorn, 143.
  • Barrel, 149.
  • Base line, 102.
  • B. T. U., 180, 181.
  • Beeswax, 174.
  • Bell metal, 164.
  • Belt, 68.
  • Belt, Lacing, 68, 69.
  • Bench, 77, 104.
  • Benzine, 169.
  • Benzol, 173.
  • Bevel, 69, 70, 125, 126.
  • Bibb, 70.
  • Bismuth, 118.
  • Bisulphate of carbon, 185.
  • Bisulphate of sodium, 172.
  • Bitt, 28, 42.
  • Bitts, machine, 38.
  • Bitts, plain, 38.
  • Bitts, round-nosed, 38.
  • Bitts, setting, 39.
  • Bitts, square, 38.
  • Black, ivory, 171.
  • Blade, hack-saw, 35, 36.
  • Bloodstone, 173.
  • Blue black, 173.
  • Boiler, 150, 152.
  • Boiler, compound, 161.

C

p. 215
p. 216

D

E

p. 217

F

  • Facet, 52.
  • Fahrenheit, 148, 186.
  • Feed, longitudinal, 66.
  • Feed, transverse, 66.
  • Ferric chloride, 166.
  • Filament, 160.
  • File, cross, 57.
  • File, cutter, 56.
  • File, do-able end, 57, 58.
  • File, equalizing, 57.
  • File, float cut, 57.
  • File, half round, 56.
  • File, holding, 59.
  • File, middle, 57.
  • File, movement, 59, 80.
  • File, pinion, 56.
  • File, rasp cut, 57.
  • File, rat-tail, 56.
  • File, rough, 57.
  • File, round, 56.
  • File, saw, 56.
  • File, second cut, 57.
  • File, shearing cut, 59.
  • File, slitting, 57.
  • File, smooth, 57.
  • File, square, 56.
  • File, triangular, 56.
  • Files, 36, 48, 50, 52, 53, 56, 59, 60, 114, 167, 168.
  • Files, Hexagon, 51, 52.
  • Filing, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 61.

G

p. 218

H

I

p. 219

J

  • Japan wax, 174.
  • Joint, ball and socket, 74.
  • Joint, universal, 70.
  • Joule, 174.

K

L

M

  • Machine, 26.
  • Magnesium, 166.
  • Magnesium sulphate, 169.
  • Magnet, 153.
  • Magnetism, 93.
  • Major axis, 105.
  • Malleability, 81.
  • Malleable, 112.
  • Mandrel, 66, 76.
  • Manganese, 163.
  • Marble, 162.
  • Mass, 85.
p. 220

N

  • Neat's Foot oil, 168.
  • Neroli, 168.
  • Nickel, 164.
  • Nitrate of copper, 174.

O

P

p. 221

Q

R

p. 222
  • Ratchet brace, 77.
  • Reciprocity, 82.
  • Reflected, 92.
  • Reflecting, 89.
  • Reflection, 88, 91.
  • Refraction, 92.
  • Resin, 176.
  • Resistance, 79, 82, 83.
  • Resonance, 89.
  • Rim, 96.
  • Ring, 96.
  • Rods, 180.
  • Rosemary, 166.
  • Royalty, 193.
  • Rubber, 84, 163.
  • Rule, 53.
  • Rule, key-seat, 53, 54.
  • Rust preventive, 175.

S

p. 223

T

p. 224

U

  • Ultramarine, 171.
  • Undivided, 192.
  • Undulatory, 91.
  • Unguent, 114.

V

W

Y

Z


THE BOYS' ELITE SERIES

12mo, cloth. Price 75c each.

12mo, cloth. Price $0.75 each.

Contains an attractive assortment of books for boys by standard and favorite authors. Printed from large, clear type on a superior quality of paper, bound in a superior quality of binders' cloth, ornamented with illustrated original designs on covers stamped in colors from unique and appropriate dies. Each book wrapped in attractive jacket.

Contains a great selection of books for boys by popular and well-known authors. Printed in large, clear type on high-quality paper, bound in durable cloth, decorated with original illustrated designs on colorful covers made from unique and fitting stamps. Each book comes with an appealing jacket.

1. Cudjo's Cave Cudjo's Trowbridge
2. Green Mountain Boys  
3. Life of Kit Carson Edward L. Ellis
4. Tom Westlake's Golden Luck Perry Newberry
5. Tony Keating's Surprises Mrs. G. R. Alden (Pansy)
6. Tour of the World in 80 Days Jules Verne

THE GIRLS' ELITE SERIES

12mo, cloth. Price 75c each.

12mo, cloth. Price $0.75 each.

Contains an assortment of attractive and desirable books for girls by standard and favorite authors. The books are printed on a good quality of paper in large clear type. Each title is complete and unabridged. Bound in clothene, ornamented on the sides and back with attractive illustrative designs and the title stamped on front and back.

Contains a variety of appealing and sought-after books for girls by well-known and beloved authors. The books are printed on high-quality paper in large, clear font. Each title is complete and unabridged. Bound in cloth, decorated on the sides and back with attractive designs and the title stamped on the front and back.

1. Bee and the Butterfly Lucy Foster Madison
2. Dixie School Girl Gabrielle E. Jackson
3. Girls of Mount Morris Amanda Douglas
4. Hope's Messenger Gabrielle E. Jackson
5. The Little Aunt Marion Ames Taggart
6. A Modern Cinderella Amanda Douglas

For sale by all Booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of 75c

Available at all bookstores, or delivered with free shipping upon receiving $0.75


THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS


Woodworking for Kids

A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles involved in the building of various kinds of structures, and the rudiments of architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty illustrations made especially for this work, and includes also a complete glossary of the technical terms used in the art. The most comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys.

A book that addresses all topics related to the "King of Trades" in a very practical and engaging way; explaining how to care for and use tools; drawing; designing, and planning work; the principles behind building different types of structures, and the basics of architecture. It includes more than two hundred fifty illustrations created specifically for this book, as well as a full glossary of the technical terms used in the field. This is the most comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys.


Electricity for Kids

The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the work in the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been developed, and the reasons for the various phenomena, without using technical words so as to bring it within the compass of every boy. It has a complete glossary of terms, and is illustrated with two hundred original drawings.

The author has come up with a unique approach by laying out the basic principles in each part of the science and applying the work step by step. It demonstrates how knowledge has evolved and explains the reasons behind different phenomena, avoiding technical jargon to make it accessible to every boy. It includes a full glossary of terms and features two hundred original illustrations.


Practical Mechanics for Boys

This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work, and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every subject is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a glossary which comprises a new system of cross references, a feature that will prove a welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully illustrated.

This book guides beginners through a complete series of practical workshop tasks, detailing how to use tools and the setup and operation of workshop machinery. It covers how these tools are used to accomplish tasks and the process for executing all dimensional work. Each topic is illustrated, and model building is explained. It includes a glossary with a new system of cross-references, a helpful addition for clarifying concepts. Fully illustrated.


12mo, cloth. Price $1.00 each.

12mo, cloth. Price $1 each.

For sale by all Booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of $1.00.

Available at all bookstores, or can be mailed to you for $1.00, including shipping.


The American Boy's
Sports Series

BY MARK OVERTON

12 Mo Cloth. Illustrated. Price 60c Each.

12 Mo Cloth. Illustrated. Price $0.60 Each.


These stories touch upon nearly every sport in which the active boy is interested. Baseball, rowing, football, hockey, skating, ice-boating, sailing, camping and fishing all serve to lend interest to an unusual series of books. There are the following four titles:

These stories cover almost every sport that active boys are into. Baseball, rowing, football, hockey, skating, ice boating, sailing, camping, and fishing all add excitement to this unique series of books. Here are the four titles:

1. Jack Winters' Baseball Team; or, The Mystery of the Diamond.
2. Jack Winters' Campmates; or, Vacation Days in the Woods.
3. Jack Winters' Gridiron Chums; or, When the Half-back Saved the Day.
4. Jack Winters' Iceboat Wonder; or, Leading the Hockey Team to Victory.

Phil Bradley

Mountain Boy's Series

BY SILAS R. BOONE

12 Mo. Cloth. Illustrated. Price 60c Each

12 Mo. Cloth. Illustrated. Price $0.60 Each


These books describe with interesting detail the experience of a party of boys among the mountain pines. They teach the young reader how to protect themselves against the elements, what to do and what to avoid, and above all to become self-reliant and manly. There are five titles:

These books vividly portray the adventures of a group of boys in the mountain pines. They teach young readers how to stay safe from the elements, what actions to take and what to steer clear of, and, most importantly, how to be self-reliant and courageous. There are five titles:

1. Phil Bradley's Mountain Boys; or, The Birch Bark Lodge.
2. Phil Bradley at the Wheel; or, The Mountain Boys' Mad Auto Dash.
3. Phil Bradley's Shooting Box; or, The Mountain Boys on Currituck Sound.
4. Phil Bradley's Snow-shoe Trail; or, The Mountain Boys in the Canadian Wilds.
5. Phil Bradley's Winning Way.

GIRLS' LIBERTY SERIES

Contains an assortment of attractive and desirable books for girls by standard and favorite authors. The books are printed on a good quality of paper in large clear type. Each title is complete and unabridged. Bound in clothene, ornamented on the sides and back with attractive illustrative designs and the title stamped on front and back.

Contains a variety of appealing and sought-after books for girls by well-known and beloved authors. The books are printed on high-quality paper in large, clear font. Each title is complete and unabridged. Bound in cloth, featuring attractive illustrations on the sides and back with the title embossed on the front and back.

12mo, clothene. Price 50c each.

12mo, clothbound. Price $0.50 each.

1. Camp Fire Girls on a Long Hike, or, Lost in the Great Northern Woods Stella M. Francis
2. Daddy's Girl Mrs. L. T. Meade
3. Ethel Hollister's First Summer as a Camp Fire Girl Irene Elliott Benson
4. Ethel Hollister's Second Summer Irene Elliott Benson
5. Flat Iron for a Farthing Mrs. Ewing
6. Four Little Mischiefs Rose Mulholland
7. Girls and I Mrs. Molesworth
8. Girl from America Mrs. L. T. Meade
9. Grandmother Dear Mrs. Molesworth
10. Irvington Stories Mary Mapes Dodge
11. Little Lame Prince Mrs. Muloch
12. Little Susie Stories Mrs. H. Prentiss
13. Mrs. Over the Way Julianna Horatio Ewing
14. Naughty Miss Bunny Rose Mulholland
15. Sweet Girl Graduate Mrs. L. T. Meade
16. School Queens Mrs. L. T. Meade
17. Sue, A Little Heroine Mrs. L. T. Meade
18. Wild Kitty Mrs. L. T. Meade

For sale by all Booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of 50c

Available at all bookstores, or shipped free upon receipt of 50 cents


THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS

By ROGER T. FINLAY

12mo, cloth. Price 75c each, postpaid.

12mo, cloth. Price $0.75 each, shipping included.

Thrilling adventures on land and sea of two boys and a man cast upon an island in the South Seas without food or weapons; their experience in fashioning clothing, tools and weapons, and in overcoming nature and subduing and civilizing savage tribes; covers a wide range of subjects.

Exciting adventures on land and sea involving two boys and a man stranded on an island in the South Seas without food or weapons; their experiences in making clothing, tools, and weapons, as well as battling nature and controlling and civilizing savage tribes, cover a broad range of topics.

1. The Castaways 5. The Capture and Pursuit
2. Exploring the Island 6. The Conquest of the Savages
3. The Mysteries of the Caverns 7. The Adventures on Strange Islands
4. The Tribesmen 8. The Treasures of the Islands

THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS

By ELBERT FISHER

12mo, cloth. Price 75c each, postpaid.

12mo, cloth. Price $0.75 each, including shipping.

This is a series of form books relating the adventures of two boys who made a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They meet with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their adventures from a medium for the introduction of much instructive matter relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports of boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each chapter, there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the author, and four striking halftones.

This is a series of books about the adventures of two boys who travel around the world, earning their keep as they go. They encounter various people with unique habits and customs, and their experiences provide a way to introduce a lot of informative content about the character and industries of the cities and countries they visit. Each foreign country they travel through features descriptions of the local boys' games. The books are decorated with unique illustrations at the beginning and end of each chapter, featuring 36 original drawings by the author in each book, along with four impressive halftones.

1. From New York to the Golden Crate
2. From San Francisco to Japan
3. From Tokio to Bombay
4. From India to the War Zone

1. From New York to the Golden State
2. From San Francisco to Japan
3. From Tokyo to Mumbai
4. From India to the War Zone

For sale by all Booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of 75c

Available from all bookstores, or shipped for free when you send $0.75


BOYS' COPYRIGHTED BOOKS

Printed from large, clear type on a superior quality of paper, embellished with original illustrations by eminent artists, and bound in a superior quality of book binders' cloth, ornamented with illustrated covers, stamped in colors from unique and appropriate dies, each book wrapped in a glazed paper wrapper printed in colors.

Printed in large, clear type on high-quality paper, featuring original illustrations by well-known artists, and bound in top-notch book cloth, decorated with illustrated covers stamped in colors from distinctive and suitable designs, each book is wrapped in a glossy paper cover printed in colors.

MOTOR BOAT BOYS SERIES
By Louis Arundel

MOTOR BOAT BOYS SERIES
By Louis Arundel

1. The Motor Club's Cruise Down the Mississippi; or, The Dash for Dixie.

1. The Motor Club's Cruise Down the Mississippi; or, The Dash for Dixie.

2. The Motor Club on the St. Lawrence River; or, Adventures Among the Thousand Islands.

2. The Motor Club on the St. Lawrence River; or, Adventures Among the Thousand Islands.

3. The Motor Club on the Great Lakes; or, Exploring the Mystic Isle of Mackinac.

3. The Motor Club on the Great Lakes; or, Exploring the Mysterious Isle of Mackinac.

4. Motor Boat Boys Among the Florida Keys; or, The Struggle for the Leadership.

4. Motor Boat Boys Among the Florida Keys; or, The Fight for Control.

5. Motor Boat Boys Down the Coast; or, Through Storm and Stress.

5. Motor Boat Boys Down the Coast; or, Through Storm and Stress.

6. Motor Boat Boys' River Chase.

6. Motor Boat Boys' River Chase.

THE BIRD BOYS SERIES
By John Luther Langworthy

THE BIRD BOYS SERIES
By John Luther Langworthy

1. The Bird Boys; or, The Young Sky Pilots' First Air Voyage.

1. The Bird Boys; or, The Young Sky Pilots' First Air Voyage.

2. The Bird Boys on the Wing; or, Aeroplane Chums in the Tropics.

2. The Bird Boys in Flight; or, Airplane Friends in the Tropics.

3. The Bird Boys Among the Clouds; or, Young Aviators in a Wreck.

3. The Bird Boys Among the Clouds; or, Young Aviators in a Wreck.

4. Bird Boys' Flight; or, A Hydroplane Round-up.

4. Bird Boys' Flight; or, A Hydroplane Round-up.

5. Bird Boys' Aeroplane Wonder; or, Young Aviators on a Cattle Ranch.

5. Bird Boys' Airplane Wonder; or, Young Aviators on a Cattle Ranch.

CANOE AND CAMPFIRE SERIES
By St. George Rathborne

CANOE AND CAMPFIRE SERIES
By St. George Rathborne

1. Canoe Mates in Canada; or, Three Boys Afloat on the Saskatchewan.

1. Canoe Mates in Canada; or, Three Boys Afloat on the Saskatchewan.

2. Young Fur Takers; or, Traps and Trails in the Wilderness.

2. Young Fur Takers; or, Traps and Trails in the Wilderness.

3. The House Boat Boys; or, Drifting Down to the Sunny South.

3. The House Boat Boys; or, Floating Down to the Sunny South.

4. Chums in Dixie; or, The Strange Cruise in the Motor Boat.

4. Friends in the South; or, The Odd Journey in the Motorboat.

5. Camp Mates in Michigan; or, With Pack and Paddle in the Pine Woods.

5. Camp Mates in Michigan; or, With Pack and Paddle in the Pine Woods.

6. Rocky Mountain Boys; or, Camping in the Big Game Country.

6. Rocky Mountain Boys; or, Camping in the Big Game Country.

For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of 75c

For sale by all bookstores, or shipped with free shipping upon receiving $0.75


ALWAYS ASK FOR THE DONOHUE

Complete Editions and you will get the best for the least money

Complete Editions and you'll get the most for the least money.

Henty Series

Henty Collection

FOR BOYS

FOR GUYS

G. A. Henty was the most prolific writer of boy's stories of the nineteenth century. From two to five books a year came from his facile pen. No Christmas holidays were complete without a new "Henty Book." This new series comprises 45 titles. They are printed on an extra quality of paper, from new plates and bound in the best quality of cloth, stamped on back and side in inks from unique and attractive dies. 12 mo. cloth. Each book in a printed wrapper.

G. A. Henty was the most prolific writer of boys' stories in the nineteenth century. He published two to five books a year with ease. No Christmas holiday felt complete without a new "Henty Book." This new series includes 45 titles. They're printed on high-quality paper, from new plates, and bound in premium cloth, stamped on the back and side in unique and appealing inks. 12 mo. cloth. Each book comes in a printed wrapper.

1Among Malay Pirates 24Lion of St. Mark
2Bonnie Prince Charlie 26Lost Heir, The
3Boy Knight, The 25Lion of the North
4Bravest of the Brave 27Maori and Settler
5By England's Aid 28One of the 28th
6By Pike and Dyke 29Orange and Green
7By Right of Conquest 30Out on the Pampas
8By Sheer Pluck 31Queen's Cup, The
9Captain Bayley's Heir 32Rujub, the Juggler
10Cat of Bubastes 33St. George for England
11Col. Thorndyke's Secret 34Sturdy and Strong
12Cornet of Horse, The 35Through the Fray
13Dragon and the Raven 36True to the Old Flag
14Facing Death 37Under Drake's Flag
15Final Reckoning, A 38With Clive in India
16For Name and Fame 39With Lee in Virginia
17For the Temple 40With Wolfe in Canada
18Friends, Though Divided 41Young Buglers, The
19Golden Canon 42Young Carthaginians
20In Freedom's Cause 43Young Colonists, The
21In the Reign of Terror 44Young Franc-Tireurs
22In Times of Peril 45Young Midshipman
23Jack Archer   

All of above titles can be procured at the store where this book was bought, or sent to any address for 75c, postage paid, by the publishers

All of the above titles can be purchased at the store where this book was bought, or sent to any address for 75 cents, with postage paid, by the publishers.


ALWAYS ASK FOR THE DONOHUE

COMPLETE EDITIONS—THE BEST FOR LEAST MONEY

COMPLETE EDITIONS—THE BEST VALUE FOR YOUR MONEY

WOODCRAFT

Woodworking

for Boy Scouts and Others

for Boy Scouts and Others

By OWEN JONES and MARCUS WOODMAN With a Message to Boy Scouts by SIR BADEN-POWELL, Founder of the Boy Scouts' Movement.

By OWEN JONES and MARCUS WOODMAN With a Message to Boy Scouts by SIR BADEN-POWELL, Founder of the Boy Scouts' Movement.

One of the essential requirements of the Boy Scout training is a Knowledge of Woodcraft. This necessitates a book embracing all the subjects and treating on all the topics that a thorough knowledge of Woodcraft implies.

One of the key requirements of Boy Scout training is a Knowledge of Woodcraft. This requires a book that covers all the subjects and addresses all the topics that a solid understanding of Woodcraft entails.

This book thoroughly exhausts the subject. It imparts a comprehensive knowledge of woods from fungus growth to the most stately monarch of the forest; it treats of the habits and lairs of all the feathered and furry inhabitants of the woods. Shows how to trail wild animals; how to identify birds and beasts by their tracks, calls, etc. Tells how to forecast the weather, and in fact; treats on every phase of nature with which a Boy Scout or any woodman or lover of nature should be familiar. The authorship guarantees it's authenticity and reliability. Indispensable to "Boy Scouts" and others. Printed from large clear type on superior paper.

This book covers the topic in great detail. It provides a thorough understanding of forests, from fungi to the tallest trees. It discusses the habits and homes of all the birds and animals that live in the woods. It explains how to track wild animals and identify them by their footprints, calls, and more. It also teaches how to predict the weather and essentially covers every aspect of nature that a Boy Scout, woodsman, or nature enthusiast should know. The authorship ensures its authenticity and reliability. It's a must-have for "Boy Scouts" and others. Printed in large, clear type on high-quality paper.

Embellished With Over 100 Thumb Nail
Illustrations Taken From Life

Embellished with over 100 thumbnail
illustrations based on real life

Bound in Cloth. Stamped with unique and appropriate designs in ink!

Bound in cloth. Stamped with unique and fitting designs in ink!

Price, 75c Postpaid

Price, 75¢ Postpaid

M. A. DONOHUE & CO.

M. A. Donohue & Co.

701-727 S. Dearborn St. CHICAGO

Transcriber's Note:

Transcriber's Note:

Every effort has been made to replicate this text as faithfully as possible, including obsolete and variant spellings and other inconsistencies. Obvious spelling/typographical and punctuation errors have been corrected after careful comparison with other occurrences within the text and consultation of external sources. Minor punctuation errors have been amended without note.

Every effort has been made to reproduce this text as accurately as possible, including outdated and alternative spellings and other inconsistencies. Obvious spelling, typographical, and punctuation errors have been corrected after careful comparison with other instances within the text and consultation of external sources. Minor punctuation mistakes have been fixed without further notation.

Page 137: Incorrect pressure of 88 oz. for wind speed of 10 mph changed to 8 oz.

Page 137: The incorrect pressure of 88 oz. for a wind speed of 10 mph has been updated to 8 oz.

Page 146: Micron incorrectly printed as 1.25400, changed to 1/24500.

Page 146: Micron was incorrectly printed as 1.25400, changed to 1/24500.

Page 178: Corrected table entry for 1-7/8, printed as 1/7-16.

Page 178: Corrected table entry for 1-7/8, printed as 1/7-16.

Alphabetic order errors in the glossary retained.

Alphabetical order errors in the glossary kept.




        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!